Merge branch 'master' into merge-job
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texi
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
b3adc24a 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
b8891f8d 24@set CSKY
49fa1e15 25@set H8300
0285c67d 26@set HPPA
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15 36@set Renesas
b4cbbe8f 37@set S/390
49fa1e15
AM
38@set SPU
39@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 40@set WIN32
e0001a05 41@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
42@end ifset
43@c man end
44
9160ea82
AM
45@ifnottex
46@dircategory Software development
47@direntry
252b5132 48* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
49@end direntry
50@end ifnottex
252b5132 51
0e9517a9 52@copying
e49e529d
JM
53This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
54@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
55@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
56@end ifset
57version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 58
b3adc24a 59Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 60
cf055d54 61Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 62under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
63or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
64with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
65Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 66section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 67@end copying
252b5132
RH
68@iftex
69@finalout
70@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 71@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 72@titlepage
71ba23f6 73@title The GNU linker
252b5132 74@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
75@subtitle @code{ld}
76@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
77@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
78@end ifset
252b5132
RH
79@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
80@author Steve Chamberlain
81@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
82@page
83
84@tex
85{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
86\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
87\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 88\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
89\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
90}
91\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
92@end tex
93
94@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 95@c man begin COPYRIGHT
b3adc24a 96Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 97
0285c67d 98Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 99under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
100or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 103section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 104@c man end
252b5132 105
252b5132
RH
106@end titlepage
107@end iftex
4ecceb71 108@contents
252b5132
RH
109@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
84ec0e6d 111@ifnottex
252b5132 112@node Top
71ba23f6 113@top LD
e49e529d
JM
114This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117@end ifset
118version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 119
cf055d54 120This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
121Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 123
252b5132
RH
124@menu
125* Overview:: Overview
126* Invocation:: Invocation
127* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128@ifset GENERIC
129* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130@end ifset
131@ifclear GENERIC
132@ifset H8300
133* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
135@ifset Renesas
136* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132 137@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
138@ifset ARM
139* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
140@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
141@ifset M68HC11
142* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
143@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
144@ifset HPPA
145* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
147@ifset M68K
148* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
149@end ifset
833794fc
MR
150@ifset MIPS
151* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
152@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
153@ifset POWERPC
154* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155@end ifset
156@ifset POWERPC64
157* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158@end ifset
b4cbbe8f
AK
159@ifset S/390
160* S/390 ELF:: ld and S/390 ELF Support
161@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
162@ifset SPU
163* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
164@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
165@ifset TICOFF
166* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
167@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
168@ifset WIN32
169* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
170@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
171@ifset XTENSA
172* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
173@end ifset
252b5132
RH
174@end ifclear
175@ifclear SingleFormat
176* BFD:: BFD
177@end ifclear
178@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
179
180* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
181* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 182* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 183* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 184@end menu
84ec0e6d 185@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
186
187@node Overview
188@chapter Overview
189
190@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
191@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 192
0879a67a 193@ifset man
0285c67d 194@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 195ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
196@c man end
197
198@c man begin SEEALSO
199ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
200the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
201@file{ld}.
202@c man end
203@end ifset
204
205@c man begin DESCRIPTION
206
ff5dcc92 207@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 208their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 209compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 210
ff5dcc92 211@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
212a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
213to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
214
0285c67d
NC
215@ifset man
216@c For the man only
ece2d90e 217This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
218@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
219language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
220@end ifset
221
252b5132 222@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
223This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
224to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
225write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
226@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
227available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
228@end ifclear
229
230Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
231linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
232execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 233@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
234(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
235
0285c67d
NC
236@c man end
237
252b5132
RH
238@node Invocation
239@chapter Invocation
240
0285c67d
NC
241@c man begin DESCRIPTION
242
ff5dcc92 243The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
244and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
245you have many choices to control its behavior.
246
0285c67d
NC
247@c man end
248
252b5132
RH
249@ifset UsesEnvVars
250@menu
a05a5b64 251* Options:: Command-line Options
252b5132
RH
252* Environment:: Environment Variables
253@end menu
254
255@node Options
a05a5b64 256@section Command-line Options
252b5132
RH
257@end ifset
258
259@cindex command line
260@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
261
262@c man begin OPTIONS
263
252b5132
RH
264The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
265practice few of them are used in any particular context.
266@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 267For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
268object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
269link a file @code{hello.o}:
270
271@smallexample
272ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
273@end smallexample
274
ff5dcc92 275This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
276result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
277the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
278directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
279
ff5dcc92 280Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
281point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
282as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
283which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
284files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
285different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
286occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
287option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
288noted in the descriptions below.
289
290@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
291Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
292together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
293options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
294an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
295
296Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
297specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
298and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
299are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
300message @samp{No input files}.
301
36f63dca 302If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
303assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
304augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
305linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
306permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
307or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
308@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
309script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
310extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
311to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
312the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
313
314For options whose names are a single letter,
315option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
316whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
317option that requires them.
318
319For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 320precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 321@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 322this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 323only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
324@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
325name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
326output.
327
328Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
329option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
330immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
331@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
332Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
333accepted.
252b5132 334
36f63dca 335Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
a05a5b64 336(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command-line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
337prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
338compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
339
340@smallexample
2509a395 341 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
342@end smallexample
343
344This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
345silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
346may also arise when passing options that require values through a
347driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
348a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
349and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
350the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
351
352@smallexample
353 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
354@end smallexample
4e53152f 355
a05a5b64 356Here is a table of the generic command-line switches accepted by the GNU
4e53152f
NC
357linker:
358
ff5dcc92 359@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 360@include at-file.texi
dff70155 361
2509a395
SL
362@kindex -a @var{keyword}
363@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
364This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
365argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
366@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
367@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
368to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
369
7ee314fa
AM
370@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
372Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
373@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
374specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
375will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
376finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 377it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 378This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 379interface.
7ee314fa 380
252b5132
RH
381@ifclear SingleFormat
382@cindex binary input format
383@kindex -b @var{format}
384@kindex --format=@var{format}
385@cindex input format
386@cindex input format
387@item -b @var{input-format}
388@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
389@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
390file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 391@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 392that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 393configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 394to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
395default input format the most usual format on each machine.
396@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
397supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
398formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
399@xref{BFD}.
400
401You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
402binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
403linking object files of different formats), by including
404@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 405particular format.
252b5132
RH
406
407The default format is taken from the environment variable
408@code{GNUTARGET}.
409@ifset UsesEnvVars
410@xref{Environment}.
411@end ifset
412You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
413@code{TARGET};
414@ifclear man
415see @ref{Format Commands}.
416@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
417@end ifclear
418
419@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
420@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
421@cindex compatibility, MRI
422@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
423@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 424For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 425files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
426@ifclear man
427@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
428@end ifclear
429@ifset man
430the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
431@end ifset
432Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 433the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
434scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
435If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
436specified by any @samp{-L} options.
437
438@cindex common allocation
439@kindex -d
440@kindex -dc
441@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 442@item -d
252b5132
RH
443@itemx -dc
444@itemx -dp
445These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
446compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
447even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
448script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
449@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
450
7ee314fa
AM
451@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
452@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
453@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
454@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
455Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
456@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
457specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
458will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
459option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 460The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 461
252b5132
RH
462@cindex entry point, from command line
463@kindex -e @var{entry}
464@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 465@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
466@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
467Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
468program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
469named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
470and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
471base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
472@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
473and other ways of specifying the entry point.
474
b58f81ae
DJ
475@kindex --exclude-libs
476@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
477Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 478exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
479@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
480automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
481port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
482explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
483option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
484be treated as hidden.
485
e1c37eb5
DK
486@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
487@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
488Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
489should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
490into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
491may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
492used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
493the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
494match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
495command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
496of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
497regardless of this option.
498
252b5132
RH
499@cindex dynamic symbol table
500@kindex -E
501@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 502@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
503@item -E
504@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
505@itemx --no-export-dynamic
506When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
507option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
508all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
509set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
510
511If you do not use either of these options (or use the
512@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
513dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
514referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
515
516If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
517back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
518dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
519linking the program itself.
520
55255dae 521You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 522be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 523See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 524
8b747e1a
DK
525Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
526support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
527the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
528
36f63dca 529@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
530@cindex big-endian objects
531@cindex endianness
532@kindex -EB
533@item -EB
534Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
535
536@cindex little-endian objects
537@kindex -EL
538@item -EL
539Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 540@end ifclear
252b5132 541
2509a395
SL
542@kindex -f @var{name}
543@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
544@item -f @var{name}
545@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
546When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
547to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
548table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
549symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
550
551If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
552run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
553the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
554first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
555@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
556in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
557Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
558implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
a094d01f 559machine-specific performance.
252b5132
RH
560
561This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
562will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
563
2509a395
SL
564@kindex -F @var{name}
565@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 566@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 567@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
568When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
569the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
570of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
571on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
572
573If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
574run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
575dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
576filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
577found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
578used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
579@var{name}.
580
ff5dcc92 581Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 582toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
583object files.
584@ifclear SingleFormat
585The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 586@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 587@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
588environment variable.
589@end ifclear
590The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
591creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 592
3dbf70a2 593@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
594@kindex -fini=@var{name}
595@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
596When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
597executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
598address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
599the function to call.
600
252b5132
RH
601@kindex -g
602@item -g
603Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
604
2509a395
SL
605@kindex -G @var{value}
606@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 607@cindex object size
2509a395 608@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
609@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
610Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
611@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 612MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
613sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
614
615@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 616@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 617@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 618@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
619@itemx -soname=@var{name}
620When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
621the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
622which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
623linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
624field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
625
626@kindex -i
627@cindex incremental link
628@item -i
629Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
630
3dbf70a2 631@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
632@kindex -init=@var{name}
633@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
634When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
635executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
636of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
637function to call.
638
252b5132 639@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 640@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 641@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 642@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
643@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
644Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
645list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
646If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 647will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 648will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 649
ff5dcc92 650On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
651files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
652and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
653called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
654@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
655indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
656to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
657@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
658
659The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
660specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
661was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
662command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
663archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
664the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
665
ff5dcc92 666See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
667archives multiple times.
668
669You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
670
671@ifset GENERIC
672This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 673if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
674behaviour of the AIX linker.
675@end ifset
676
677@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 678@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 679@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 680@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 681@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
682Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
683for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
684option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
685in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
686on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 687@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
688order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
689how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
690option is specified.
252b5132 691
3aa2d05a
NC
692If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
693prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
694@samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 695
252b5132
RH
696@ifset UsesEnvVars
697The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 698@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
699some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
700@end ifset
701
702The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
703@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
704at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
705
706@cindex emulation
707@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 708@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
709Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
710emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
711
712If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
713@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
714
715Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
716configured.
717
718@cindex link map
719@kindex -M
720@kindex --print-map
721@item -M
722@itemx --print-map
723Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
724information about the link, including the following:
725
726@itemize @bullet
727@item
3b83e13a 728Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
729@item
730How common symbols are allocated.
731@item
732All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
733which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
734@item
735The values assigned to symbols.
736
737Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
738involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
739have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
740linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
741of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
742the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
743linker script containing:
744
745@smallexample
746 foo = 1
747 foo = foo * 4
748 foo = foo + 8
749@end smallexample
750
751will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
752option is used:
753
754@smallexample
755 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
756 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
757 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
758@end smallexample
759
760See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
761scripts.
d2ef37eb 762
06ddcada
AM
763@item
764How GNU properties are merged.
d2ef37eb 765
06ddcada
AM
766When the linker merges input .note.gnu.property sections into one output
767.note.gnu.property section, some properties are removed or updated.
768These actions are reported in the link map. For example:
d2ef37eb
L
769
770@smallexample
771Removed property 0xc0000002 to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (not found)
772@end smallexample
773
06ddcada 774This indicates that property 0xc0000002 is removed from output when
d2ef37eb
L
775merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose property 0xc0000002 value
776is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, which doesn't have property 0xc0000002.
777
778@smallexample
06ddcada 779Updated property 0xc0010001 (0x1) to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (0x1)
d2ef37eb
L
780@end smallexample
781
06ddcada 782This indicates that property 0xc0010001 value is updated to 0x1 in output
d2ef37eb
L
783when merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value
784is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value is 0x1.
252b5132
RH
785@end itemize
786
035801ce
FS
787@cindex link map discarded
788@kindex --print-map-discarded
789@kindex --no-print-map-discarded
790@item --print-map-discarded
791@itemx --no-print-map-discarded
792Print (or do not print) the list of discarded and garbage collected sections
793in the link map. Enabled by default.
794
252b5132
RH
795@kindex -n
796@cindex read-only text
797@cindex NMAGIC
798@kindex --nmagic
799@item -n
800@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
801Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
802libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
803mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
804
805@kindex -N
806@kindex --omagic
807@cindex read/write from cmd line
808@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 809@item -N
252b5132
RH
810@itemx --omagic
811Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
812not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
813libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
814mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
815is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
816specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
817
818@kindex --no-omagic
819@cindex OMAGIC
820@item --no-omagic
821This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
822sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
823be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
824shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
825
826@kindex -o @var{output}
827@kindex --output=@var{output}
828@cindex naming the output file
829@item -o @var{output}
830@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 831Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
832option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
833script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
834
835@kindex -O @var{level}
836@cindex generating optimized output
837@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 838If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 839the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
840should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
841option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
842the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
843no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
844of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 845
387dd777
DP
846@kindex -plugin @var{name}
847@item -plugin @var{name}
848Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
849the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
850automatically added by the complier, when using link time
851optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
852wish.
853
854Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
855from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
856@command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
857those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
41f37a6f 858copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
387dd777 859based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
6c19b93b 860just copy in the newest one.
387dd777 861
26278bb8
UD
862@kindex --push-state
863@cindex push state governing input file handling
864@item --push-state
865The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
866flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
867restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
868
869The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
870@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
871@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
872@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
873@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
874@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
875
876One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
877used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
878listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
879something as follows:
880
881@smallexample
882-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
883@end smallexample
884
885@kindex --pop-state
886@cindex pop state governing input file handling
67cecaba 887@item --pop-state
26278bb8
UD
888Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
889flags governing input file handling.
890
a712da20
NC
891@kindex -q
892@kindex --emit-relocs
893@cindex retain relocations in final executable
894@item -q
895@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 896Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
897Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
898order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
899in larger executables.
900
dbab7a7b
NC
901This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
902
4f471f39
RS
903@kindex --force-dynamic
904@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
905@item --force-dynamic
906Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
907to VxWorks targets.
908
252b5132
RH
909@cindex partial link
910@cindex relocatable output
911@kindex -r
1049f94e 912@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 913@item -r
1049f94e 914@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 915Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 916turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
917linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
918magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
919@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 920@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
921If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
922linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
923constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
924
62bf86b4
HPN
925When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
926partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
927relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
928example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
929with input files in other formats at all.
930
252b5132
RH
931This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
932
933@kindex -R @var{file}
934@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
935@cindex symbol-only input
936@item -R @var{filename}
937@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
938Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
939relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
940to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
941programs. You may use this option more than once.
942
ff5dcc92 943For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 944followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 945the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
946
947@kindex -s
948@kindex --strip-all
949@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 950@item -s
252b5132
RH
951@itemx --strip-all
952Omit all symbol information from the output file.
953
954@kindex -S
955@kindex --strip-debug
956@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 957@item -S
252b5132
RH
958@itemx --strip-debug
959Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
960
a70f34c0
NC
961@kindex --strip-discarded
962@kindex --no-strip-discarded
963@item --strip-discarded
964@itemx --no-strip-discarded
965Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
966Enabled by default.
967
252b5132
RH
968@kindex -t
969@kindex --trace
970@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 971@item -t
252b5132 972@itemx --trace
4f4690cd
AM
973Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them. If
974@samp{-t} is given twice then members within archives are also printed.
975@samp{-t} output is useful to generate a list of all the object files
976and scripts involved in linking, for example, when packaging files for
977a linker bug report.
252b5132
RH
978
979@kindex -T @var{script}
980@kindex --script=@var{script}
981@cindex script files
982@item -T @var{scriptfile}
983@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
984Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 985@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 986@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
987output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
988the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
989specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
990options accumulate.
252b5132 991
14be8564
L
992@kindex -dT @var{script}
993@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
994@cindex script files
995@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
996@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
997Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
998
999This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
1000processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
1001command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
1002@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
1003behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
1004command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
1005the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
1006@samp{gcc}).
1007
252b5132
RH
1008@kindex -u @var{symbol}
1009@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
1010@cindex undefined symbol
1011@item -u @var{symbol}
1012@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
1013Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
1014symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
1015modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
1016different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
1017option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
1018
0a618243
AB
1019If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
1020into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
1021undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
1022instead.
1023
1024@kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1025@cindex symbols, require defined
1026@cindex defined symbol
1027@item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1028Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1029is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1030is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1031and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1032@code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1033can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1034
252b5132
RH
1035@kindex -Ur
1036@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 1037@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
1038For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1039@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 1040turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
1041@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1042It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1043with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1044be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1045@samp{-r} for the others.
1046
c005eb9e
AB
1047@kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1048@cindex orphan sections
1049@cindex sections, orphan
1050@item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1051Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1052specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1053
1054@var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1055
1056@table @code
1057@item place
1058Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1059the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
d2732b69 1060@samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
c005eb9e
AB
1061
1062@item discard
1063All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1064@samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1065
1066@item warn
1067The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1068issue a warning.
1069
1070@item error
1071The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1072@end table
1073
1074The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1075
577a0623
AM
1076@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1077@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1078Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1079@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1080missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1081specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1082multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1083input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1084in a linker script.
a854a4a7 1085
252b5132
RH
1086@kindex -v
1087@kindex -V
1088@kindex --version
1089@cindex version
1090@item -v
1091@itemx --version
1092@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1093Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1094lists the supported emulations.
1095
1096@kindex -x
1097@kindex --discard-all
1098@cindex deleting local symbols
1099@item -x
1100@itemx --discard-all
1101Delete all local symbols.
1102
1103@kindex -X
1104@kindex --discard-locals
1105@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1106@item -X
252b5132 1107@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1108Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1109system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1110or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1111
1112@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1113@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1114@cindex symbol tracing
1115@item -y @var{symbol}
1116@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1117Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1118option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1119to prepend an underscore.
1120
1121This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1122don't know where the reference is coming from.
1123
1124@kindex -Y @var{path}
1125@item -Y @var{path}
1126Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1127for Solaris compatibility.
1128
1129@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1130@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1131The recognized keywords are:
1132@table @samp
1133
e6e2dfbd
AM
1134@item bndplt
1135Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1136
1137@item call-nop=prefix-addr
1138@itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1139@itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1140@itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1141Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1142to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1143@option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1144@option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1145@option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1146@option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1147Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1148
233a0083
L
1149@item cet-report=none
1150@itemx cet-report=warning
1151@itemx cet-report=error
1152Specify how to report the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT and
1153GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK properties in input .note.gnu.property
1154section. @option{cet-report=none}, which is the default, will make the
1155linker not report missing properties in input files.
1156@option{cet-report=warning} will make the linker issue a warning for
1157missing properties in input files. @option{cet-report=error} will make
1158the linker issue an error for missing properties in input files.
1159Note that @option{ibt} will turn off the missing
1160GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT property report and @option{shstk} will
1161turn off the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK property report.
1162Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1163
cd6d6c15 1164@item combreloc
e6e2dfbd
AM
1165@itemx nocombreloc
1166Combine multiple dynamic relocation sections and sort to improve
1167dynamic symbol lookup caching. Do not do this if @samp{nocombreloc}.
cd6d6c15 1168
b8871f35 1169@item common
e6e2dfbd
AM
1170@itemx nocommon
1171Generate common symbols with STT_COMMON type during a relocatable
1172link. Use STT_OBJECT type if @samp{nocommon}.
1173
1174@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1175Set the page size most commonly used to @var{value}. Memory image
1176layout will be optimized to minimize memory pages if the system is
1177using pages of this size.
b8871f35 1178
cd6d6c15 1179@item defs
97a232d7
NC
1180Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1181is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1182This option is the inverse of @samp{-z undefs}.
cd6d6c15 1183
e6e2dfbd
AM
1184@item dynamic-undefined-weak
1185@itemx nodynamic-undefined-weak
1186Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1187if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1188by symbol visibility or versioning. Do not make them dynamic if
1189@samp{nodynamic-undefined-weak}. If neither option is given, a target
1190may default to either option being in force, or make some other
1191selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic. Not all targets support
1192these options.
1193
6aa29e7b
JJ
1194@item execstack
1195Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1196
b039ef04
L
1197@item global
1198This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1199the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1200of subsequently loaded libraries.
1201
93ab9c0d
NC
1202@item globalaudit
1203This option is only meaningful when building a dynamic executable.
1204This option marks the executable as requiring global auditing by
1205setting the @code{DF_1_GLOBAUDIT} bit in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} dynamic
1206tag. Global auditing requires that any auditing library defined via
a05a5b64 1207the @option{--depaudit} or @option{-P} command-line options be run for
6c19b93b 1208all dynamic objects loaded by the application.
93ab9c0d 1209
e6e2dfbd
AM
1210@item ibtplt
1211Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1212Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1213
8df93cb5 1214@item ibt
e6e2dfbd
AM
1215Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1216to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1217Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1218
cd6d6c15
NC
1219@item initfirst
1220This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1221It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1222before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1223the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1224the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1225objects.
1226
1227@item interpose
e6e2dfbd
AM
1228Specify that the dynamic loader should modify its symbol search order
1229so that symbols in this shared library interpose all other shared
1230libraries not so marked.
cd6d6c15 1231
5fa222e4
AM
1232@item lazy
1233When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1234dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1235the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1236Lazy binding is the default.
1237
cd6d6c15 1238@item loadfltr
e6e2dfbd 1239Specify that the object's filters be processed immediately at runtime.
cd6d6c15 1240
e6e2dfbd
AM
1241@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1242Set the maximum memory page size supported to @var{value}.
cd6d6c15 1243
e6e2dfbd
AM
1244@item muldefs
1245Allow multiple definitions.
b8871f35 1246
cd6d6c15 1247@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1248Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1249defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1250
1251@item nodefaultlib
e6e2dfbd
AM
1252Specify that the dynamic loader search for dependencies of this object
1253should ignore any default library search paths.
cd6d6c15
NC
1254
1255@item nodelete
e6e2dfbd 1256Specify that the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
cd6d6c15
NC
1257
1258@item nodlopen
e6e2dfbd 1259Specify that the object is not available to @code{dlopen}.
cd6d6c15
NC
1260
1261@item nodump
e6e2dfbd 1262Specify that the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
cd6d6c15 1263
6aa29e7b
JJ
1264@item noexecstack
1265Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1266
e6e2dfbd
AM
1267@item noextern-protected-data
1268Don't treat protected data symbols as external when building a shared
1269library. This option overrides the linker backend default. It can be
1270used to work around incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1271generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1272module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1273i386 and x86-64.
8dfef1bd 1274
e6e2dfbd
AM
1275@item noreloc-overflow
1276Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1277relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1278overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
6aa29e7b 1279
cd6d6c15
NC
1280@item now
1281When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1282dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
e6e2dfbd
AM
1283when the shared library is loaded by dlopen, instead of deferring
1284function call resolution to the point when the function is first
1285called.
cd6d6c15
NC
1286
1287@item origin
e6e2dfbd 1288Specify that the object requires @samp{$ORIGIN} handling in paths.
cd6d6c15 1289
6aa29e7b 1290@item relro
e6e2dfbd 1291@itemx norelro
def5c83c
AM
1292Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object. This
1293specifies a memory segment that should be made read-only after
1294relocation, if supported. Specifying @samp{common-page-size} smaller
1295than the system page size will render this protection ineffective.
e6e2dfbd 1296Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment if @samp{norelro}.
6aa29e7b 1297
47acac12
L
1298@item separate-code
1299@itemx noseparate-code
1300Create separate code @code{PT_LOAD} segment header in the object. This
1301specifies a memory segment that should contain only instructions and must
1302be in wholly disjoint pages from any other data. Don't create separate
1303code @code{PT_LOAD} segment if @samp{noseparate-code} is used.
1304
e6e2dfbd
AM
1305@item shstk
1306Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
1307to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
1308Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
24718e3b 1309
04c3a755 1310@item stack-size=@var{value}
e6e2dfbd 1311Specify a stack size for an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
04c3a755
NS
1312Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1313@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1314
e6e2dfbd
AM
1315@item text
1316@itemx notext
1317@itemx textoff
1318Report an error if DT_TEXTREL is set, i.e., if the binary has dynamic
1319relocations in read-only sections. Don't report an error if
1320@samp{notext} or @samp{textoff}.
48580982 1321
97a232d7
NC
1322@item undefs
1323Do not report unresolved symbol references from regular object files,
1324either when creating an executable, or when creating a shared library.
1325This option is the inverse of @samp{-z defs}.
1326
cd6d6c15
NC
1327@end table
1328
ece2d90e 1329Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1330
1331@kindex -(
1332@cindex groups of archives
1333@item -( @var{archives} -)
1334@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1335The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1336either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1337
1338The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1339references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1340the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1341archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1342object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1343would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
5d3db3e2 1344they will all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
252b5132
RH
1345resolved.
1346
1347Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1348it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1349more archives.
1350
69da35b5
NC
1351@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1352@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1353@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1354@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1355Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1356recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1357and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1358the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1359behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1360so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1361restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1362
4a43e768
AM
1363@kindex --as-needed
1364@kindex --no-as-needed
1365@item --as-needed
1366@itemx --no-as-needed
1367This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1368on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1369the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1370on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1371needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1372emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1373non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1374the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1375non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1376Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1377the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1378needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1379from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1380
e56f61be
L
1381@kindex --add-needed
1382@kindex --no-add-needed
1383@item --add-needed
1384@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1385These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1386their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1387options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1388and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1389
252b5132
RH
1390@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1391@item -assert @var{keyword}
1392This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1393
1394@kindex -Bdynamic
1395@kindex -dy
1396@kindex -call_shared
1397@item -Bdynamic
1398@itemx -dy
1399@itemx -call_shared
1400Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1401for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1402default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1403for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1404multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1405@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1406
a1ab1d2a
UD
1407@kindex -Bgroup
1408@item -Bgroup
1409Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1410section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1411object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1412@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1413only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1414
252b5132
RH
1415@kindex -Bstatic
1416@kindex -dn
1417@kindex -non_shared
1418@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1419@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1420@itemx -dn
1421@itemx -non_shared
1422@itemx -static
1423Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1424platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1425variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1426may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1427library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1428option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1429option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1430shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1431references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1432libraries.
252b5132
RH
1433
1434@kindex -Bsymbolic
1435@item -Bsymbolic
1436When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1437definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1438for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1914e264
AM
1439within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1440platforms which support shared libraries.
252b5132 1441
40b36307
L
1442@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1443@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1444When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1445symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307 1446This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1914e264 1447libraries.
40b36307 1448
55255dae
L
1449@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1450@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1451Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1452typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1453global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1454within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1455to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1456in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1457which support shared libraries.
1458
1459The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1460scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1461
40b36307
L
1462@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1463@item --dynamic-list-data
1464Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1465
1466@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1467@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1468Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1469is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1470
0b8a70d9
L
1471@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1472@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1473Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1474
252b5132
RH
1475@kindex --check-sections
1476@kindex --no-check-sections
1477@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1478@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1479Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1480been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1481perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1482suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1483allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
a05a5b64 1484restored by using the command-line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1485Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1486force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1487option.
252b5132 1488
ddbb8a31
NC
1489@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1490@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1491@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1492@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1493This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1494by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1495command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1496output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1497input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1498specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1499follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1500behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1501
1502This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1503libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1504mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1505their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1506required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1507the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1508dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1509symbols.
1510
252b5132
RH
1511@cindex cross reference table
1512@kindex --cref
1513@item --cref
1514Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1515generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1516Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1517
1518The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1519easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1520sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1521symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1522definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1523where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1524symbol are listed.
252b5132 1525
4818e05f
AM
1526@cindex common allocation
1527@kindex --no-define-common
1528@item --no-define-common
1529This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1530The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1531@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1532
1533The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1534the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1535of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1536forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1537Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1538from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1539This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1540and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1541duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1542paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1543
7bdf4127
AB
1544@cindex group allocation in linker script
1545@cindex section groups
1546@cindex COMDAT
1547@kindex --force-group-allocation
1548@item --force-group-allocation
1549This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1550normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1551default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1552change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1553command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1554effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1555
252b5132 1556@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1557@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1558@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1559Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1560address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1561times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1562limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1563context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1564symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1565constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1566using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1567@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1568equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1569
1570@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1571@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1572@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1573@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1574@itemx --no-demangle
1575These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1576and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1577present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1578underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1579mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1580different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1581to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1582demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1583is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1584
1585@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1586@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1587@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1588@item -I@var{file}
1589@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1590Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1591generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1592linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1593doing.
1594
9b8b325a
RF
1595@kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1596@item --no-dynamic-linker
1597When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1598linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1599executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1600entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1601
a70f34c0
NC
1602@kindex --embedded-relocs
1603@item --embedded-relocs
1604This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
a094d01f 1605that the relocs are stored in a target-specific section. This option
a70f34c0
NC
1606is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1607targets.
1608
3f0a5f17
ME
1609@kindex --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1610@item --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1611Do not allow multiple definitions with symbols included
1612in filename invoked by -R or --just-symbols
1613
7ce691ae 1614@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1615@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1616@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1617@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1618Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1619with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1620
252b5132
RH
1621@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1622@item --force-exe-suffix
1623Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1624
1625If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1626@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1627the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1628option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1629Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1630it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1631
1632@kindex --gc-sections
1633@kindex --no-gc-sections
1634@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1635@item --gc-sections
1636@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1637Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1638targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761 1639performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
0f088b2a
KT
1640@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1641collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1642implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
252b5132 1643
d5465ba2
AM
1644@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1645examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1646symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1647command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1648referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1649libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1650referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1651the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
b69e1ff3
CC
1652relocations. See @samp{--entry}, @samp{--undefined}, and
1653@samp{--gc-keep-exported}.
d5465ba2 1654
ac69cbc6 1655This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1656@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
b69e1ff3
CC
1657specified either by one of the options @samp{--entry},
1658@samp{--undefined}, or @samp{--gc-keep-exported} or by a @code{ENTRY}
1659command in the linker script.
ac69cbc6 1660
c17d87de
NC
1661@kindex --print-gc-sections
1662@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1663@cindex garbage collection
1664@item --print-gc-sections
1665@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1666List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1667printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1668collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1669default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1670be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1671line.
1672
22185505 1673@kindex --gc-keep-exported
1674@cindex garbage collection
1675@item --gc-keep-exported
1676When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1677collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1678default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1679executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1680collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1681Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1682it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1683ELF format targets.
1684
30824704
RM
1685@kindex --print-output-format
1686@cindex output format
1687@item --print-output-format
1688Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1689other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1690in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1691
3604cb1f
TG
1692@kindex --print-memory-usage
1693@cindex memory usage
1694@item --print-memory-usage
1695Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1696the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1697quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1698headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1699parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1700
1701@smallexample
1702Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1703 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1704 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1705@end smallexample
1706
252b5132
RH
1707@cindex help
1708@cindex usage
1709@kindex --help
1710@item --help
1711Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1712
ea20a7da
CC
1713@kindex --target-help
1714@item --target-help
a094d01f 1715Print a summary of all target-specific options on the standard output and exit.
ea20a7da 1716
2509a395
SL
1717@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1718@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1719Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1720@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1721
1722@cindex memory usage
1723@kindex --no-keep-memory
1724@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1725@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1726symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1727instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1728necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1729while linking a large executable.
1730
1731@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1732@kindex -z defs
97a232d7 1733@kindex -z undefs
252b5132 1734@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1735@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1736Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1737is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1738The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1739behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1740libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1741
97a232d7
NC
1742The effects of this option can be reverted by using @code{-z undefs}.
1743
aa713662
L
1744@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1745@kindex -z muldefs
1746@item --allow-multiple-definition
1747@itemx -z muldefs
1748Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1749report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1750first definition will be used.
1751
b79e8c78 1752@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1753@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1754@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1755@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1756Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1757This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1758determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1759shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1760how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1761
903249d7
NC
1762The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1763referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1764an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1765a shared library.
1766
1767The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1768libraries specified at link time are that:
1769
1770@itemize @bullet
1771@item
1772A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1773that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1774resolvable at load time.
1775@item
1776There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1777symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1778
1779The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1780select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1781architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1782appropriate memset function.
1783@end itemize
b79e8c78 1784
31941635
L
1785@kindex --no-undefined-version
1786@item --no-undefined-version
1787Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1788it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1789will be issued instead.
1790
3e3b46e5
PB
1791@kindex --default-symver
1792@item --default-symver
1793Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1794exported symbols.
1795
1796@kindex --default-imported-symver
1797@item --default-imported-symver
1798Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1799imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1800
252b5132
RH
1801@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1802@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1803Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1804files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1805been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1806This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1807errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1808have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1809inappropriate.
1810
fe7929ce
AM
1811@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1812@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1813Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1814library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1815
252b5132
RH
1816@kindex --no-whole-archive
1817@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1818Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1819archive files.
1820
1821@cindex output file after errors
1822@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1823@item --noinhibit-exec
1824Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1825Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1826errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1827when it issues any error whatsoever.
1828
0a9c1c8e
CD
1829@kindex -nostdlib
1830@item -nostdlib
1831Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1832command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1833(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1834
252b5132 1835@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1836@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1837@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1838@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1839file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1840@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1841object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1842object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1843should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1844usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1845name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1846list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1847command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1848this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1849@end ifclear
1850
76359541
TP
1851@kindex --out-implib
1852@item --out-implib @var{file}
1853Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1854the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1855library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1856may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1857behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1858step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1859the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1860
36af4a4e
JJ
1861@kindex -pie
1862@kindex --pic-executable
1863@item -pie
1864@itemx --pic-executable
1865@cindex position independent executables
1866Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1867ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1868libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1869address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1870normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1871defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1872
252b5132
RH
1873@kindex -qmagic
1874@item -qmagic
1875This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1876
1877@kindex -Qy
1878@item -Qy
1879This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1880
1881@kindex --relax
1882@cindex synthesizing linker
1883@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1884@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1885@item --relax
28d5f677 1886@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1887An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1888@ifset GENERIC
1889This option is only supported on a few targets.
1890@end ifset
1891@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1892@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132 1893@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1894@ifset XTENSA
1895@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1896@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1897@ifset M68HC11
1898@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1899@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1900@ifset NIOSII
1901@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1902@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1903@ifset POWERPC
1904@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1905@end ifset
252b5132 1906
a094d01f 1907On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target-specific,
28d5f677
NC
1908global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1909addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1910synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1911instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1912
1913On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1914debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1915@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1916This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1917family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1918@end ifset
1919
1920@ifset GENERIC
1921On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1922but ignored.
1923@end ifset
1924
28d5f677
NC
1925On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1926@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1927
252b5132
RH
1928@cindex retaining specified symbols
1929@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1930@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1931@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1932@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1933Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1934discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1935symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1936@ifset GENERIC
1937(such as VxWorks)
1938@end ifset
1939where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1940run-time memory.
1941
1942@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1943or symbols needed for relocations.
1944
1945You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1946line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1947
1948@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1949@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1950@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1951@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1952Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1953linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1954arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
c1b00498
MR
1955them to locate shared objects at runtime.
1956
1957The @option{-rpath} option is also used when locating shared objects which
1958are needed by shared objects explicitly included in the link; see the
1959description of the @option{-rpath-link} option. Searching @option{-rpath}
1960in this way is only supported by native linkers and cross linkers which
1961have been configured with the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1962
1963If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an ELF executable, the
1964contents of the environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it
1965is defined.
252b5132 1966
ff5dcc92 1967The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
d8506323 1968SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1969@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1970runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1971options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1972gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1973file systems.
252b5132 1974
ff5dcc92 1975For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1976followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1977the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1978@end ifset
1979
1980@ifset GENERIC
1981@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1982@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1983@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1984When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1985happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1986of the input files.
1987
1988When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1989non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1990shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1991explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1992specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1993@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1994either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1995appearing multiple times.
1996
e680a6b6
NC
1997The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
1998directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
1999containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
2000and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
200164-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
2002
2003The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
2004@var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
2005supported.
2006
28c309a2
NC
2007This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
2008that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
2009is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
2010runtime linker would do.
2011
252b5132 2012The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 2013libraries:
252b5132
RH
2014@enumerate
2015@item
ff5dcc92 2016Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 2017@item
ff5dcc92
SC
2018Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
2019between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
2020specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
2021used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
2022at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
2023by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
2024the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 2025@item
e2a83dd0
NC
2026On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
2027@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
2028environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 2029@item
ff5dcc92
SC
2030On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
2031directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 2032@item
a1b8d843 2033For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 2034variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 2035@item
ec4eb78a
L
2036For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
2037@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
2038libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
2039@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
2040@item
252b5132
RH
2041The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
2042@item
2043For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
2044exists, the list of directories found in that file.
2045@end enumerate
2046
2047If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
2048warning and continue with the link.
2049@end ifset
2050
2051@kindex -shared
2052@kindex -Bshareable
2053@item -shared
2054@itemx -Bshareable
2055@cindex shared libraries
2056Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
2057and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 2058shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
2059undefined symbols in the link.
2060
252b5132 2061@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
2062@item --sort-common
2063@itemx --sort-common=ascending
2064@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
2065This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2066ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2067sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2068eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2069between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2070specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 2071
2509a395
SL
2072@kindex --sort-section=name
2073@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
2074This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2075patterns in the linker script.
2076
2509a395
SL
2077@kindex --sort-section=alignment
2078@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
2079This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2080patterns in the linker script.
2081
a70f34c0
NC
2082@kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2083@item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2084This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2085.dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2086post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2087
252b5132 2088@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 2089@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 2090Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
2091each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2092size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
2093
2094@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 2095@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 2096Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 2097output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 2098This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
2099certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2100cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2101that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2102support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2103input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2104more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 2105many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
2106
2107@kindex --stats
2108@item --stats
2109Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2110as execution time and memory usage.
2111
2509a395 2112@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
2113@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2114Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2115configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2116that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2117
a70f34c0
NC
2118@kindex --task-link
2119@item --task-link
2120This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2121file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2122
252b5132
RH
2123@kindex --traditional-format
2124@cindex traditional format
2125@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
2126For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2127the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
2128use the traditional format instead.
2129
2130@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 2131For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
2132symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2133full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2134@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 2135trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
2136combine duplicate entries.
2137
2509a395
SL
2138@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2139@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
2140Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2141address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2142times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2143line.
2144@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2145for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2146@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2147should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2148sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2149
2509a395
SL
2150@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2151@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2152@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 2153@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
2154@item -Tbss=@var{org}
2155@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2156@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2157Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 2158@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 2159
2509a395
SL
2160@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2161@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 2162@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
2163When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2164byte of the text segment.
258795f5 2165
9d5777a3
RM
2166@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2167@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2168@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2169When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2170the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2171text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2172
0d705e9f
AM
2173@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2174@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2175@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2176When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2177model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2178
560e09e9
NC
2179@kindex --unresolved-symbols
2180@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2181Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2182values for @samp{method}:
2183
2184@table @samp
2185@item ignore-all
da8bce14 2186Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
2187
2188@item report-all
da8bce14 2189Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
2190
2191@item ignore-in-object-files
2192Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2193ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2194
2195@item ignore-in-shared-libs
2196Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2197ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2198when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2199libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2200command line.
2201@end table
2202
2203The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2204by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2205
2206Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2207unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2208can change this to a warning.
2209
1715a13c
L
2210@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2211@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 2212@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 2213@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 2214Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 2215supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
2216the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2217argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
2218
2219@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2220@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 2221@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
2222Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2223used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 2224about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
2225is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2226see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2227use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2228symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2229@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 2230
7ce691ae 2231@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
2232@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2233@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2234@item --warn-common
2235Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 2236a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
2237but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2238you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 2239Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
2240warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2241
2242There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2243
2244@table @samp
2245@item int i = 1;
2246A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2247file.
2248
2249@item extern int i;
2250An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2251There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2252variable somewhere.
2253
2254@item int i;
2255A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2256variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2257The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2258single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2259size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2260a definition of the same variable.
2261@end table
2262
2263The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2264Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2265just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2266encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2267a common symbol.
2268
2269@enumerate
2270@item
2271Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2272definition for the symbol.
2273@smallexample
2274@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2275 overridden by definition
2276@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2277@end smallexample
2278
2279@item
2280Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2281the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2282except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2283@smallexample
2284@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2285 overriding common
2286@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2287@end smallexample
2288
2289@item
2290Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2291@smallexample
2292@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2293 of `@var{symbol}'
2294@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2295@end smallexample
2296
2297@item
2298Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2299@smallexample
2300@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2301 overridden by larger common
2302@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2303@end smallexample
2304
2305@item
2306Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2307the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2308encountered in a different order.
2309@smallexample
2310@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2311 overriding smaller common
2312@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2313@end smallexample
2314@end enumerate
2315
2316@kindex --warn-constructors
2317@item --warn-constructors
2318Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2319object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2320detect the use of global constructors.
2321
2322@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2323@item --warn-multiple-gp
2324Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2325This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2326Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2327section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2328of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2329base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2330base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2331bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2332large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2333values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2334option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2335
2336@kindex --warn-once
2337@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2338@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2339@item --warn-once
2340Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2341which refers to it.
2342
2343@kindex --warn-section-align
2344@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2345@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2346@item --warn-section-align
2347Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2348alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2349The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2350is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2351the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2352
8fdd7217
NC
2353@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2354@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2355Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2356
a0c402a5
L
2357@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2358@item --warn-alternate-em
2359Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2360
560e09e9
NC
2361@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2362@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2363If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2364@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2365This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2366
2367@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2368@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2369This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2370it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2371
252b5132
RH
2372@kindex --whole-archive
2373@cindex including an entire archive
2374@item --whole-archive
2375For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2376@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2377in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2378files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2379library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2380library. This option may be used more than once.
2381
7ec229ce 2382Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2383about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2384Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2385list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2386your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2387
2509a395
SL
2388@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2389@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2390Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2391@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2392undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2393@var{symbol}.
2394
2395This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2396wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2397wishes to call the system function, it should call
2398@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2399
2400Here is a trivial example:
2401
2402@smallexample
2403void *
cc2f008e 2404__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2405@{
cc2f008e 2406 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2407 return __real_malloc (c);
2408@}
2409@end smallexample
2410
ff5dcc92 2411If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2412all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2413instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2414call the real @code{malloc} function.
2415
2416You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2417links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2418you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2419file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2420call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2421
4ea904ed
SH
2422Only undefined references are replaced by the linker. So, translation unit
2423internal references to @var{symbol} are not resolved to
2424@code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. In the next example, the call to @code{f} in
2425@code{g} is not resolved to @code{__wrap_f}.
2426
2427@smallexample
2428int
2429f (void)
2430@{
2431 return 123;
2432@}
2433
2434int
2435g (void)
2436@{
2437 return f();
2438@}
2439@end smallexample
2440
6aa29e7b 2441@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b 2442@kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
6aa29e7b 2443@item --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b
NC
2444@itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2445Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2446(@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2447section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
6aa29e7b 2448
e41b3a13
JJ
2449@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2450@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2451Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2452generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2453if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2454
6c1439be
L
2455@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2456@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2457@item --enable-new-dtags
2458@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2459This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2460systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2461@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2462and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2463If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2464created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2465those options are only available for ELF systems.
2466
2d643429 2467@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2468@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2469Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2470close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2471time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2472increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2473value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2474
fdc90cb4
JJ
2475@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2476@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2477Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2478@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2479new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2480the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
c8455dc9
NC
2481hash tables. The default depends upon how the linker was configured,
2482but for most Linux based systems it will be @code{both}.
fdc90cb4 2483
0ce398f1
L
2484@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2485@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2486@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2487@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2488@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2489@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2490@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2491@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
9af89fba
NC
2492On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2493compressed using zlib.
2494
2495@option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2496sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2497DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2498instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2499also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2500sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2501
2502The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2503@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2504
2505Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2506sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2507for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2508uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2509
2510The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2511involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2512default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2513@option{--help} option.
0ce398f1 2514
35835446
JR
2515@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2516@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2517This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2518linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2519for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2520about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2521
4f9c04f7 2522Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 25231021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2524run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2525has been used.
2526
2527The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2528enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2529
c0065db7
RM
2530@kindex --build-id
2531@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2532@item --build-id
2533@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c 2534Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
6033bf41 2535or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
61e2488c
JT
2536unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2537@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2538@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2539@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2540the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2541string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2542@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2543is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2544
2545The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2546that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2547unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2548to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2549file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2550string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2551
2552Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2553@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2554@end table
2555
0285c67d
NC
2556@c man end
2557
36f63dca 2558@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2559
0285c67d
NC
2560@c man begin OPTIONS
2561
ff5dcc92 2562The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2563the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2564normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2565use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2566@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2567like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2568symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2569object file).
2570
2571In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
a05a5b64 2572support additional command-line options that are specific to the i386
252b5132
RH
2573PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2574values by either a space or an equals sign.
2575
ff5dcc92 2576@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2577
2578@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2579@item --add-stdcall-alias
2580If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2581as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2582[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2583
2584@kindex --base-file
2585@item --base-file @var{file}
2586Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2587addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2588@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2589[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2590
2591@kindex --dll
2592@item --dll
2593Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2594@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2595file.
bb10df36 2596[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2597
88183869
DK
2598@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2599@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2600@item --enable-long-section-names
2601@itemx --disable-long-section-names
56e6cf80 2602The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
88183869 2603the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
56e6cf80
NC
2604for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2605fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
88183869
DK
2606to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2607allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2608disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2609generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2610as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2611with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2612GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2613information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2614option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2615section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2616when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2617image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2618[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2619
252b5132
RH
2620@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2621@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2622@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2623@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2624If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2625do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2626only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2627resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2628undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2629@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2630to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2631warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2632import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2633to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2634feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2635@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2636mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2637[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2638
522f09cd
KT
2639@kindex --leading-underscore
2640@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2641@item --leading-underscore
2642@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2643For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2644in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2645disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2646
252b5132
RH
2647@cindex DLLs, creating
2648@kindex --export-all-symbols
2649@item --export-all-symbols
2650If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2651be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2652otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2653explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2654attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2655option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2656@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2657@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2658exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2659re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2660such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2661@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2662@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2663Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2664not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2665extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2666(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2667These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2668@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2669@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2670@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2671@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2672[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2673
2674@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2675@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2676Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2677exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2678[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2679
2927aaca
NC
2680@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2681@item --exclude-all-symbols
2682Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2683[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2684
252b5132
RH
2685@kindex --file-alignment
2686@item --file-alignment
2687Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2688file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2689512.
bb10df36 2690[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2691
2692@cindex heap size
2693@kindex --heap
2694@item --heap @var{reserve}
2695@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2696Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2697to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2698committed.
bb10df36 2699[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2700
2701@cindex image base
2702@kindex --image-base
2703@item --image-base @var{value}
2704Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2705the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2706is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2707your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2708other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2709for dlls.
bb10df36 2710[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2711
2712@kindex --kill-at
2713@item --kill-at
2714If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2715symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2716[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2717
26d2d8a2
BF
2718@kindex --large-address-aware
2719@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2720If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2721header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2722greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2723or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2724section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2725[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2726
f69a2f97
NC
2727@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2728@item --disable-large-address-aware
2729Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2730This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2731driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2732addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2733[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2734
252b5132
RH
2735@kindex --major-image-version
2736@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2737Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2738[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2739
2740@kindex --major-os-version
2741@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2742Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2743[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2744
2745@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2746@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2747Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2748[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2749
2750@kindex --minor-image-version
2751@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2752Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2753[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2754
2755@kindex --minor-os-version
2756@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2757Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2758[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2759
2760@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2761@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2762Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2763[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2764
2765@cindex DEF files, creating
2766@cindex DLLs, creating
2767@kindex --output-def
2768@item --output-def @var{file}
2769The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2770file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2771(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2772library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2773automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2774[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2775
b044cda1 2776@cindex DLLs, creating
b044cda1
CW
2777@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2778@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2779@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2780Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2781@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2782By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2783for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2784execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2785[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2786
2787@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2788@item --disable-auto-image-base
2789Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2790user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2791default.
bb10df36 2792[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2793
2794@cindex DLLs, linking to
2795@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2796@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2797When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2798search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2799@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2800between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2801uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2802@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2803[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2804
2805@kindex --enable-auto-import
2806@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e 2807Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
317ff008
EB
2808DATA imports from DLLs, thus making it possible to bypass the dllimport
2809mechanism on the user side and to reference unmangled symbol names.
2810[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2811
2812The following remarks pertain to the original implementation of the
2813feature and are obsolete nowadays for Cygwin and MinGW targets.
2814
2815Note: Use of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section
2816of the image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
2817PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
4d8907ac 2818
e2a83dd0
NC
2819Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2820data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2821placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2822around a problem with consts that is described here:
2823http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2824
4d8907ac
DS
2825Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2826see this message:
0d888aac 2827
ece2d90e 2828"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2829documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2830
ece2d90e
NC
2831This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2832ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2833allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2834fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2835constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2836multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2837this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2838of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2839the warning, and exit.
2840
2841There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2842data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2843
2fa9fc65
NC
2844One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2845of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2846this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2847
c0065db7
RM
2848A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2849that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2850there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2851a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2852
2853@example
2854extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2855extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2856 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2857@end example
2858
2859or
2860
2861@example
2862extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2863extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2864 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2865@end example
2866
c0065db7 2867For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2868is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2869
2870@example
2871extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2872extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2873 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2874@end example
2875
c406afaf
NC
2876or
2877
2878@example
2879extern long long extern_ll;
2880extern_ll -->
2881 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2882@end example
2883
2fa9fc65 2884A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2885'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2886@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2887requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2888building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2889merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2890between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2891constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2892
2893Original:
2894@example
2895--foo.h
2896extern int arr[];
2897--foo.c
2898#include "foo.h"
2899void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2900 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2901@}
2902@end example
2903
2904Solution 1:
2905@example
2906--foo.h
2907extern int arr[];
2908--foo.c
2909#include "foo.h"
2910void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2911 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2912 volatile int *parr = arr;
2913 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2914@}
2915@end example
2916
2917Solution 2:
2918@example
2919--foo.h
2920/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2921#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2922 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2923#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2924#else
2925#define FOO_IMPORT
2926#endif
2927extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2928--foo.c
2929#include "foo.h"
2930void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2931 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2932@}
2933@end example
2934
c0065db7 2935A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2936library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2937for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2938functions).
b044cda1
CW
2939
2940@kindex --disable-auto-import
2941@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2942Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2943@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2944[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2945
2fa9fc65
NC
2946@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2947@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2948If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2949that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2950a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2951environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2952[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2953
2954@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2955@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
317ff008 2956Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2957[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2958
b044cda1
CW
2959@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2960@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2961Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2962[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2963
252b5132
RH
2964@kindex --section-alignment
2965@item --section-alignment
2966Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2967addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2968[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2969
2970@cindex stack size
2971@kindex --stack
2972@item --stack @var{reserve}
2973@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2974Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2975to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2976committed.
bb10df36 2977[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2978
2979@kindex --subsystem
2980@item --subsystem @var{which}
2981@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2982@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2983Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2984legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2985@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2986the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2987@var{which}.
bb10df36 2988[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2989
2f563b51
DK
2990The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2991of the PE file header:
2992[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2993
2d5c3743
NC
2994@kindex --high-entropy-va
2995@item --high-entropy-va
2996Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2997(ASLR).
dc9bd8c9
HD
2998This option also implies @option{--dynamicbase} and
2999@option{--enable-reloc-section}.
2d5c3743 3000
2f563b51
DK
3001@kindex --dynamicbase
3002@item --dynamicbase
3003The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
3004randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
3005Vista for i386 PE targets.
dc9bd8c9 3006This option also implies @option{--enable-reloc-section}.
2f563b51
DK
3007
3008@kindex --forceinteg
3009@item --forceinteg
3010Code integrity checks are enforced.
3011
3012@kindex --nxcompat
3013@item --nxcompat
3014The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
3015This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
3016
3017@kindex --no-isolation
3018@item --no-isolation
3019Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
3020
3021@kindex --no-seh
3022@item --no-seh
3023The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
3024this image.
3025
3026@kindex --no-bind
3027@item --no-bind
3028Do not bind this image.
3029
3030@kindex --wdmdriver
3031@item --wdmdriver
3032The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 3033
2f563b51
DK
3034@kindex --tsaware
3035@item --tsaware
3036The image is Terminal Server aware.
3037
0cb112f7
CF
3038@kindex --insert-timestamp
3039@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
3040@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
3041Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
3042as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
3043other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
56e6cf80 3044will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
eeb14e5a
LZ
3045same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
3046can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
56e6cf80 3047that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
eeb14e5a 3048identically.
dc9bd8c9
HD
3049
3050@kindex --enable-reloc-section
3051@item --enable-reloc-section
3052Create the base relocation table, which is necessary if the image
3053is loaded at a different image base than specified in the PE header.
252b5132
RH
3054@end table
3055
0285c67d
NC
3056@c man end
3057
ac145307
BS
3058@ifset C6X
3059@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
3060
3061@c man begin OPTIONS
3062
3063The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
3064libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
3065all executables use an index of 0.
3066
3067@table @gcctabopt
3068
3069@kindex --dsbt-size
3070@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
56e6cf80 3071This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
ac145307
BS
3072or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
3073entries.
3074
3075@kindex --dsbt-index
3076@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
3077This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
3078to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
3079executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
3080@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
3081
fbd9ad90
PB
3082@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
3083The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
3084exidx entries in frame unwind info.
3085
ac145307
BS
3086@end table
3087
3088@c man end
3089@end ifset
3090
b8891f8d
AJ
3091@ifset CSKY
3092@subsection Options specific to C-SKY targets
3093
3094@c man begin OPTIONS
3095
3096@table @gcctabopt
3097
3098@kindex --branch-stub on C-SKY
3099@item --branch-stub
3100This option enables linker branch relaxation by inserting branch stub
3101sections when needed to extend the range of branches. This option is
3102usually not required since C-SKY supports branch and call instructions that
3103can access the full memory range and branch relaxation is normally handled by
3104the compiler or assembler.
3105
3106@kindex --stub-group-size on C-SKY
3107@item --stub-group-size=@var{N}
3108This option allows finer control of linker branch stub creation.
3109It sets the maximum size of a group of input sections that can
3110be handled by one stub section. A negative value of @var{N} locates
3111stub sections after their branches, while a positive value allows stub
3112sections to appear either before or after the branches. Values of
3113@samp{1} or @samp{-1} indicate that the
3114linker should choose suitable defaults.
3115
3116@end table
3117
3118@c man end
3119@end ifset
3120
93fd0973
SC
3121@ifset M68HC11
3122@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3123
3124@c man begin OPTIONS
3125
3126The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3127memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3128
3129@table @gcctabopt
3130
3131@kindex --no-trampoline
3132@item --no-trampoline
3133This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3134is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3135instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3136
3137@kindex --bank-window
3138@item --bank-window @var{name}
3139This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3140the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3141The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3142paging and addresses within the memory window.
3143
3144@end table
3145
3146@c man end
3147@end ifset
3148
7fb9f789
NC
3149@ifset M68K
3150@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3151
3152@c man begin OPTIONS
3153
3154The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3155when linking for 68K targets.
3156
3157@table @gcctabopt
3158
3159@kindex --got
3160@item --got=@var{type}
3161This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3162@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3163@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3164Info entry for @file{ld}.
3165
3166@end table
3167
3168@c man end
3169@end ifset
3170
833794fc
MR
3171@ifset MIPS
3172@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3173
3174@c man begin OPTIONS
3175
3176The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
8b10b0b3
MR
3177generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3178linking for MIPS targets.
833794fc
MR
3179
3180@table @gcctabopt
3181
3182@kindex --insn32
3183@item --insn32
3184@kindex --no-insn32
3185@itemx --no-insn32
3186These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3187generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3188or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
318932-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3190used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3191possible.
3192
8b10b0b3
MR
3193@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3194@item --ignore-branch-isa
3195@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3196@itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3197These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3198transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3199accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3200is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3201instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3202equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3203calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3204a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3205an error.
3206
3734320d
MF
3207@kindex --compact-branches
3208@item --compact-branches
3209@kindex --no-compact-branches
3210@item --compact-branches
3211These options control the generation of compact instructions by the linker
3212in the PLT entries for MIPS R6.
3213
833794fc
MR
3214@end table
3215
3216@c man end
3217@end ifset
3218
252b5132
RH
3219@ifset UsesEnvVars
3220@node Environment
3221@section Environment Variables
3222
0285c67d
NC
3223@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3224
560e09e9 3225You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
3226@ifclear SingleFormat
3227@code{GNUTARGET},
3228@end ifclear
3229@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 3230
36f63dca 3231@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
3232@kindex GNUTARGET
3233@cindex default input format
3234@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3235use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3236of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 3237@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
3238of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3239attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3240this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3241there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3242object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3243BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3244in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 3245@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
3246
3247@kindex LDEMULATION
3248@cindex default emulation
3249@cindex emulation, default
3250@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3251@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3252behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3253available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3254the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3255variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3256linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
3257
3258@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3259@cindex demangling, default
3260Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3261@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3262default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3263a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3264may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3265options.
3266
0285c67d
NC
3267@c man end
3268@end ifset
3269
252b5132
RH
3270@node Scripts
3271@chapter Linker Scripts
3272
3273@cindex scripts
3274@cindex linker scripts
3275@cindex command files
3276Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3277written in the linker command language.
3278
3279The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3280the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3281the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3282more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3283direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3284described below.
3285
3286The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3287yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
a05a5b64
TP
3288linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command-line option
3289to display the default linker script. Certain command-line options,
252b5132
RH
3290such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3291
3292You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3293line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3294default linker script.
3295
3296You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3297to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3298Linker Scripts}.
3299
3300@menu
3301* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3302* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3303* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3304* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3305* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3306* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3307* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3308* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3309* VERSION:: VERSION Command
3310* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3311* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3312@end menu
3313
3314@node Basic Script Concepts
3315@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3316@cindex linker script concepts
3317We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3318describe the linker script language.
3319
3320The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3321file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3322@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3323The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3324purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3325among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3326section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3327in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3328
3329Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3330also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 3331contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
3332the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3333A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3334area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3335loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3336which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3337of debugging information.
3338
3339Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3340first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3341the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3342@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3343section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3344same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3345is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3346(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3347based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3348RAM address would be the VMA.
3349
3350You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3351program with the @samp{-h} option.
3352
3353Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3354@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3355has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3356information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3357will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3358static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3359referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3360
3361You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3362program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3363option.
3364
3365@node Script Format
3366@section Linker Script Format
3367@cindex linker script format
3368Linker scripts are text files.
3369
3370You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3371either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3372symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3373generally ignored.
3374
3375Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3376If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3377otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3378double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3379file name.
3380
3381You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3382@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3383to whitespace.
3384
3385@node Simple Example
3386@section Simple Linker Script Example
3387@cindex linker script example
3388@cindex example of linker script
3389Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3390
3391The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3392@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3393memory layout of the output file.
3394
3395The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3396describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3397code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3398@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3399Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3400your input files.
3401
3402For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
34030x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3404linker script which will do that:
3405@smallexample
3406SECTIONS
3407@{
3408 . = 0x10000;
3409 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3410 . = 0x8000000;
3411 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3412 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3413@}
3414@end smallexample
3415
3416You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3417followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3418descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3419
252b5132
RH
3420The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3421sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3422counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3423other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3424current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3425incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3426@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3427
3428The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3429required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3430after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3431which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3432wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3433means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3434
3435Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3436@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3437@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3438
3439The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3440the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3441at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3442output section, the value of the location counter will be
3443@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3444effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3445immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3446
3447The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3448alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3449example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3450sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3451may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3452sections.
3453
3454That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3455
3456@node Simple Commands
3457@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3458@cindex linker script simple commands
3459In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3460
3461@menu
3462* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3463* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3464@ifclear SingleFormat
3465* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3466@end ifclear
3467
4a93e180 3468* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3469* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3470@end menu
3471
3472@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3473@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3474@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3475@cindex start of execution
3476@cindex first instruction
3477@cindex entry point
3478The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3479point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3480entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3481@smallexample
3482ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3483@end smallexample
3484
3485There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3486entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3487stopping when one of them succeeds:
3488@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3489@item
252b5132 3490the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3491@item
252b5132 3492the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3493@item
a094d01f 3494the value of a target-specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
8a758655 3495targets this is @code{start}, but PE- and BeOS-based systems for example
3ab904c4 3496check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3497@item
252b5132 3498the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3499@item
252b5132
RH
3500The address @code{0}.
3501@end itemize
3502
3503@node File Commands
36f63dca 3504@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3505@cindex linker script file commands
3506Several linker script commands deal with files.
3507
3508@table @code
3509@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3510@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3511@cindex including a linker script
3512Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3513be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3514with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
351510 levels deep.
3516
4006703d
NS
3517You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3518@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3519
252b5132
RH
3520@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3521@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3522@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3523@cindex input files in linker scripts
3524@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3525@cindex linker script input object files
3526The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3527in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3528
3529For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3530a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3531then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3532
3533In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3534script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3535
e3f2db7f
AO
3536In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3537with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3538located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3539for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3540open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
cad60a33
HPN
3541linker will search through the archive library search path.
3542The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3aa2d05a
NC
3543as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the filename
3544path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of @samp{-L} in
a05a5b64 3545@ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
252b5132 3546
ff5dcc92 3547If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
a05a5b64 3548name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command-line argument
252b5132
RH
3549@samp{-l}.
3550
3551When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3552files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3553script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3554
3555@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3556@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3557@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3558@cindex grouping input files
3559The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3560files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3561new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
a05a5b64 3562in @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
252b5132 3563
b717d30e
JJ
3564@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3565@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3566@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3567This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3568commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3569as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3570with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3571when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3572@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3573and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3574setting afterwards.
3575
252b5132
RH
3576@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3577@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3578@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3579The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3580@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3581@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
a05a5b64 3582Line Options}). If both are used, the command-line option takes
252b5132
RH
3583precedence.
3584
3585You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3586output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3587
3588@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3589@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3590@cindex library search path in linker script
3591@cindex archive search path in linker script
3592@cindex search path in linker script
3593The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3594@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132 3595@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
a05a5b64 3596on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both
252b5132 3597are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
a05a5b64 3598the command-line option are searched first.
252b5132
RH
3599
3600@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3601@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3602@cindex first input file
3603The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3604that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3605though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3606when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3607first file.
3608@end table
3609
3610@ifclear SingleFormat
3611@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3612@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3613A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3614
3615@table @code
3616@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3617@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3618@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3619@cindex output file format in linker script
3620The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3621output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3622exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
a05a5b64 3623(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both are used, the command
252b5132
RH
3624line option takes precedence.
3625
3626You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
a05a5b64 3627formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command-line options.
252b5132
RH
3628This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3629desired endianness.
3630
3631If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3632will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3633output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3634used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3635
3636For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3637command:
3638@smallexample
3639OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3640@end smallexample
3641This says that the default format for the output file is
a05a5b64 3642@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command-line
252b5132
RH
3643option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3644format.
3645
3646@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3647@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3648@cindex input file format in linker script
3649The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3650files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3651This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
a05a5b64 3652(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
252b5132
RH
3653is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3654command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3655@end table
3656@end ifclear
3657
4a93e180
NC
3658@node REGION_ALIAS
3659@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3660@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3661@cindex region alias
3662@cindex region names
3663
3664Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3665@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3666
3667@smallexample
3668REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3669@end smallexample
3670
3671The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3672memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3673to memory regions. An example follows.
3674
3675Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3676memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3677that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3678non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3679access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3680read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3681sections:
3682
3683@itemize @bullet
3684@item
3685@code{.text} program code;
3686@item
3687@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3688@item
3689@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3690@item
3691@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3692@end itemize
3693
3694The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3695part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3696output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3697systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3698@code{C}:
3699@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3700@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3701@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3702@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3703@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3704@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3705@end multitable
3706The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3707loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3708the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3709the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3710
3711The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3712includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3713memory layout:
3714@smallexample
3715INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3716
3717SECTIONS
3718 @{
3719 .text :
3720 @{
3721 *(.text)
3722 @} > REGION_TEXT
3723 .rodata :
3724 @{
3725 *(.rodata)
3726 rodata_end = .;
3727 @} > REGION_RODATA
3728 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3729 @{
3730 data_start = .;
3731 *(.data)
3732 @} > REGION_DATA
3733 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3734 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3735 .bss :
3736 @{
3737 *(.bss)
3738 @} > REGION_BSS
3739 @}
3740@end smallexample
3741
3742Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3743regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3744variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3745@table @code
3746@item A
3747Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3748@smallexample
3749MEMORY
3750 @{
3751 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3752 @}
3753
3754REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3755REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3756REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3757REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3758@end smallexample
3759@item B
3760Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3761into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3762@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3763@smallexample
3764MEMORY
3765 @{
3766 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3767 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3768 @}
3769
3770REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3771REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3772REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3773REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3774@end smallexample
3775@item C
3776Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3777@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3778initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3779system start into the @code{RAM}.
3780@smallexample
3781MEMORY
3782 @{
3783 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3784 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3785 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3786 @}
3787
3788REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3789REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3790REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3791REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3792@end smallexample
3793@end table
3794
3795It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3796@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3797necessary:
3798@smallexample
3799#include <string.h>
3800
3801extern char data_start [];
3802extern char data_size [];
3803extern char data_load_start [];
3804
3805void copy_data(void)
3806@{
3807 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3808 @{
3809 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3810 @}
3811@}
3812@end smallexample
3813
252b5132 3814@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3815@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3816There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3817
3818@table @code
3819@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3820@kindex ASSERT
3821@cindex assertion in linker script
3822Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3823with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3824
fd1c4238
NC
3825Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3826take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3827inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3828for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3829symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3830
3831@smallexample
3832 .stack :
3833 @{
3834 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3835 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3836 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3837 @}
3838@end smallexample
3839
3840will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3841PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3842can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3843
3844@smallexample
3845 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3846 .stack :
3847 @{
3848 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3849 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3850 @}
3851@end smallexample
3852
3853will work.
3854
252b5132
RH
3855@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3856@kindex EXTERN
3857@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3858Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3859symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3860modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3861each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3862command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3863
3864@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3865@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3866@cindex common allocation in linker script
3867This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3868to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3869output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3870
4818e05f
AM
3871@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3872@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3873@cindex common allocation in linker script
3874This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3875command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3876to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3877
7bdf4127
AB
3878@item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3879@kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3880@cindex group allocation in linker script
3881@cindex section groups
3882@cindex COMDAT
3883This command has the same effect as the
3884@samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
3885@command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
3886and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
3887specified (@samp{-r}).
3888
53d25da6
AM
3889@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3890@kindex INSERT
3891@cindex insert user script into default script
3892This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3893augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3894inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3895@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3896default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3897sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3898linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3899insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3900linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3901default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3902of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3903to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3904is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3905
3906@smallexample
3907SECTIONS
3908@{
3909 OVERLAY :
3910 @{
3911 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3912 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3913 @}
3914@}
3915INSERT AFTER .text;
3916@end smallexample
3917
252b5132
RH
3918@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3919@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3920@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3921This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3922references among certain output sections.
3923
3924In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3925using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3926will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3927errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3928a function defined in the other section.
3929
3930The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3931@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3932an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3933@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3934names.
3935
cdf96953
MF
3936@item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3937@kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3938@cindex cross references
3939This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3940references to one section from a list of other sections.
3941
3942The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3943output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3944a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3945there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3946must never call back.
3947
3948The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3949The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3950If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3951the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3952status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3953names, not input section names.
3954
252b5132
RH
3955@ifclear SingleFormat
3956@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3957@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3958@cindex machine architecture
3959@cindex architecture
3960Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3961of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3962architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3963the @samp{-f} option.
3964@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3965
3966@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3967@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3968This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3969@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3970in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3971@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3972@end table
3973
3974@node Assignments
3975@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3976@cindex assignment in scripts
3977@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3978@cindex variables, defining
3979You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3980the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3981
3982@menu
3983* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3984* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3985* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3986* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3987* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3988@end menu
3989
3990@node Simple Assignments
3991@subsection Simple Assignments
3992
3993You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3994
3995@table @code
3996@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3997@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3998@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3999@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
4000@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
4001@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
4002@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
4003@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
4004@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
4005@end table
4006
4007The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
4008@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
4009defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
4010
4011The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 4012may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
4013
4014The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
4015
4016Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
4017
4018You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
4019statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
4020section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
4021
4022The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
4023expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
4024
4025Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
4026assignments may be used:
4027
4028@smallexample
4029floating_point = 0;
4030SECTIONS
4031@{
4032 .text :
4033 @{
4034 *(.text)
4035 _etext = .;
4036 @}
156e34dd 4037 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
4038 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4039@}
4040@end smallexample
4041@noindent
4042In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
4043zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
4044the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
4045defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
4046upward to a 4 byte boundary.
4047
eb8476a6
MR
4048@node HIDDEN
4049@subsection HIDDEN
4050@cindex HIDDEN
4051For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
4052exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4053
4054Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
4055@code{HIDDEN}:
4056
4057@smallexample
4058HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
4059SECTIONS
4060@{
4061 .text :
4062 @{
4063 *(.text)
4064 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
4065 @}
4066 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
4067 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4068@}
4069@end smallexample
4070@noindent
4071In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
4072
252b5132
RH
4073@node PROVIDE
4074@subsection PROVIDE
4075@cindex PROVIDE
4076In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
4077only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
4078the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
4079@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
4080@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
4081@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
4082@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
4083@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4084
4085Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
4086@smallexample
4087SECTIONS
4088@{
4089 .text :
4090 @{
4091 *(.text)
4092 _etext = .;
4093 PROVIDE(etext = .);
4094 @}
4095@}
4096@end smallexample
4097
4098In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
4099underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
4100the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
4101underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
4102If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
4103linker will use the definition in the linker script.
4104
b0daac83
NC
4105Note - the @code{PROVIDE} directive considers a common symbol to be
4106defined, even though such a symbol could be combined with the symbol
4107that the @code{PROVIDE} would create. This is particularly important
4108when considering constructor and destructor list symbols such as
4109@samp{__CTOR_LIST__} as these are often defined as common symbols.
4110
7af8e998
L
4111@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4112@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4113@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4114Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
4115hidden and won't be exported.
4116
73ae6183
NC
4117@node Source Code Reference
4118@subsection Source Code Reference
4119
4120Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
4121intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
4122a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
4123symbol that does not have a value.
4124
4125Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
4126transform names in the source code into different names when they are
4127stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
4128prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
4129mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
4130of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
4131variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
4132linker script variable might be referred to as:
4133
4134@smallexample
4135 extern int foo;
4136@end smallexample
4137
4138But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4139
4140@smallexample
4141 _foo = 1000;
4142@end smallexample
4143
4144In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4145transformation has taken place.
4146
4147When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4148things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4149in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4150second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4151table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4152contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4153value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4154
4155@smallexample
4156 int foo = 1000;
4157@end smallexample
4158
10bf6894 4159creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
4160holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4161number 1000 is initially stored.
4162
4163When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4164first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4165memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4166So:
4167
4168@smallexample
4169 foo = 1;
4170@end smallexample
4171
4172looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4173associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4174address. Whereas:
4175
4176@smallexample
4177 int * a = & foo;
4178@end smallexample
4179
10bf6894 4180looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
4181and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4182the variable @samp{a}.
4183
4184Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4185the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4186an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4187
4188@smallexample
4189 foo = 1000;
4190@end smallexample
4191
4192creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4193the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4194address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4195linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4196access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4197
4198Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4199you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4200use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4201section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4202linker script contains these declarations:
4203
4204@smallexample
4205@group
4206 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
a5e406b5 4207 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
73ae6183
NC
4208 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4209@end group
4210@end smallexample
4211
4212Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4213
4214@smallexample
4215@group
4216 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 4217
73ae6183
NC
4218 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4219@end group
4220@end smallexample
4221
4222Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
5707d2ad
NC
4223Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4224arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4225
4226@smallexample
4227@group
4228 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4229
4230 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4231@end group
4232@end smallexample
4233
4234Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4235operators.
73ae6183 4236
252b5132 4237@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 4238@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
4239@kindex SECTIONS
4240The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4241into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4242
4243The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4244@smallexample
4245SECTIONS
4246@{
4247 @var{sections-command}
4248 @var{sections-command}
4249 @dots{}
4250@}
4251@end smallexample
4252
4253Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4254
4255@itemize @bullet
4256@item
4257an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4258@item
4259a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4260@item
4261an output section description
4262@item
4263an overlay description
4264@end itemize
4265
4266The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4267@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4268those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4269understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4270the layout of the output file.
4271
4272Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4273below.
4274
4275If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4276linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4277section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4278input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4279example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4280in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4281
4282@menu
4283* Output Section Description:: Output section description
4284* Output Section Name:: Output section name
4285* Output Section Address:: Output section address
4286* Input Section:: Input section description
4287* Output Section Data:: Output section data
4288* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4289* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4290* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4291* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4292@end menu
4293
4294@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 4295@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
4296The full description of an output section looks like this:
4297@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4298@group
7e7d5768 4299@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 4300 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 4301 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
4302 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4303 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4304 @{
4305 @var{output-section-command}
4306 @var{output-section-command}
4307 @dots{}
abc9061b 4308 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4309@end group
4310@end smallexample
4311
4312Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4313
4314The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4315name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
4316The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4317the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
4318The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4319
4320Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4321
4322@itemize @bullet
4323@item
4324a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4325@item
4326an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4327@item
4328data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4329@item
4330a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4331@end itemize
4332
4333@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 4334@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
4335@cindex name, section
4336@cindex section name
4337The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4338meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4339support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4340must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4341example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4342output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4343names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4344quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4345characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4346commas must be quoted.
4347
4348The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4349Discarding}.
4350
4351@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 4352@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
4353@cindex address, section
4354@cindex section address
4355The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
4356address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4357is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4358
4359If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4360section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4361to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4362alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4363contained within the output section.
4364
4365The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4366
4367@itemize @bullet
4368@item
4369If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4370is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4371in that region.
4372
4373@item
4374If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4375regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4376section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4377be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4378
4379@item
4380If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4381the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4382counter.
4383@end itemize
4384
4385@noindent
4386For example:
4387
252b5132
RH
4388@smallexample
4389.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4390@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4391
252b5132
RH
4392@noindent
4393and
ea5cae92 4394
252b5132
RH
4395@smallexample
4396.text : @{ *(.text) @}
4397@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4398
252b5132
RH
4399@noindent
4400are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4401@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4402counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
4403counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4404input sections.
252b5132
RH
4405
4406The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4407For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4408so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4409do something like this:
4410@smallexample
4411.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4412@end smallexample
4413@noindent
4414This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4415aligned upward to the specified value.
4416
4417Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
4418location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4419sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
4420
4421@node Input Section
36f63dca 4422@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
4423@cindex input sections
4424@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4425The most common output section command is an input section description.
4426
4427The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4428You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4429in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4430map the input files into your memory layout.
4431
4432@menu
4433* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4434* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4435* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4436* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4437* Input Section Example:: Input section example
4438@end menu
4439
4440@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 4441@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
4442@cindex input section basics
4443An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4444by a list of section names in parentheses.
4445
4446The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4447describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4448
4449The most common input section description is to include all input
4450sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4451include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4452@smallexample
4453*(.text)
4454@end smallexample
4455@noindent
18625d54 4456Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
8f1732fc 4457@cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
18625d54
CM
4458of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4459match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4460example:
252b5132 4461@smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4462EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4463@end smallexample
4464@noindent
4465will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4466and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4467placed inside the section list, for example:
4468@smallexample
b4346c09 4469*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 4470@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4471@noindent
4472The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4473two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4474more than one section, as described below.
252b5132
RH
4475
4476There are two ways to include more than one section:
4477@smallexample
4478*(.text .rdata)
4479*(.text) *(.rdata)
4480@end smallexample
4481@noindent
4482The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4483@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4484first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4485they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4486@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4487@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4488
8f1732fc
AB
4489When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4490is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4491immediately following section, for example:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4492@smallexample
4493*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4494@end smallexample
4495@noindent
4496will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4497@file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4498from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4499exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
8f1732fc 4500could be modified to:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4501@smallexample
4502*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4503@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4504@noindent
4505Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4506before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4507all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4508@smallexample
4509EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4510@end smallexample
a5bf7d4f 4511
252b5132
RH
4512You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4513You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4514needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4515@smallexample
4516data.o(.data)
4517@end smallexample
4518
ae17ab41
CM
4519To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4520of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4521
4522Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4523
4524@smallexample
4525@group
4526SECTIONS @{
4527 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4528 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4529@}
4530@end group
4531@end smallexample
4532
4533In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4534input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4535@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4536@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4537whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4538
967928e9
AM
4539You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4540matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4541with no whitespace around the colon.
4542
4543@table @samp
4544@item archive:file
4545matches file within archive
4546@item archive:
4547matches the whole archive
4548@item :file
4549matches file but not one in an archive
4550@end table
4551
4552Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4553wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4554single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4555@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4556within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4557also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4558other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4559from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4560command.
4561
252b5132
RH
4562If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4563the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4564commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4565@smallexample
4566data.o
4567@end smallexample
4568
967928e9
AM
4569When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4570and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4571characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4572name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4573did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4574though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4575@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4576the archive search path.
4577
4578@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4579@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4580@cindex input section wildcards
4581@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4582@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4583@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4584In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4585name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4586
4587The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4588pattern for the file name.
4589
4590The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4591
4592@table @samp
4593@item *
4594matches any number of characters
4595@item ?
4596matches any single character
4597@item [@var{chars}]
4598matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4599character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4600@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4601@item \
4602quotes the following character
4603@end table
4604
4605When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4606will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4607Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4608exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4609@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4610a @samp{/} character.
4611
4612File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4613specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4614does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4615
4616If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4617appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4618will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4619sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4620@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4621@smallexample
4622.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4623.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4624@end smallexample
4625
bcaa7b3e 4626@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4627Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4628in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4629this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4630pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4631@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4632into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4633
bcaa7b3e 4634@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
9a24a276
AM
4635@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4636@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into descending order of
4637alignment before placing them in the output file. Placing larger
4638alignments before smaller alignments can reduce the amount of padding
4639needed.
bcaa7b3e 4640
02ecc8e9 4641@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
9a24a276
AM
4642@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is also similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4643@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into ascending
4644numerical order of the GCC init_priority attribute encoded in the
4645section name before placing them in the output file. In
4646@code{.init_array.NNNNN} and @code{.fini_array.NNNNN}, @code{NNNNN} is
4647the init_priority. In @code{.ctors.NNNNN} and @code{.dtors.NNNNN},
4648@code{NNNNN} is 65535 minus the init_priority.
02ecc8e9 4649
bcaa7b3e
L
4650@cindex SORT
4651@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4652
4653When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4654can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4655
4656@enumerate
4657@item
4658@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4659It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4660sections have the same name.
4661@item
4662@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4663It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4664sections have the same alignment.
4665@item
c0065db7 4666@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4667treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4668@item
4669@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4670is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4671@item
4672All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4673@end enumerate
4674
a05a5b64 4675When both command-line section sorting option and linker script
bcaa7b3e 4676section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
a05a5b64 4677takes precedence over the command-line option.
bcaa7b3e
L
4678
4679If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
a05a5b64 4680command-line option will make the section sorting command to be
bcaa7b3e
L
4681treated as nested sorting command.
4682
4683@enumerate
4684@item
4685@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4686@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4687@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4688@item
4689@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4690@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4691@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4692@end enumerate
4693
4694If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
a05a5b64 4695command-line option will be ignored.
bcaa7b3e 4696
eda680f8 4697@cindex SORT_NONE
a05a5b64 4698@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command-line
eda680f8
L
4699section sorting option.
4700
252b5132
RH
4701If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4702@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4703precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4704
4705This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4706files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4707sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4708The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4709with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4710linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4711@smallexample
4712@group
4713SECTIONS @{
4714 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4715 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4716 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4717 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4718@}
4719@end group
4720@end smallexample
4721
4722@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4723@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4724@cindex common symbol placement
4725@cindex uninitialized data placement
4726A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4727file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4728linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4729named @samp{COMMON}.
4730
4731You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4732other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4733particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4734input files are placed in another section.
4735
4736In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4737@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4738@smallexample
4739.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4740@end smallexample
4741
4742@cindex scommon section
4743@cindex small common symbols
4744Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4745example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4746symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4747different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4748the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4749symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4750to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4751locations.
4752
4753@cindex [COMMON]
4754You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4755notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4756@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4757
4758@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4759@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4760@cindex KEEP
4761@cindex garbage collection
4762When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4763it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4764This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4765with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4766@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4767
4768@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4769@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4770The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4771to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4772start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4773@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4774follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4775@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4776@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4777All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4778files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4779
4780@smallexample
4781@group
4782SECTIONS @{
4783 outputa 0x10000 :
4784 @{
4785 all.o
4786 foo.o (.input1)
4787 @}
36f63dca
NC
4788@end group
4789@group
252b5132
RH
4790 outputb :
4791 @{
4792 foo.o (.input2)
4793 foo1.o (.input1)
4794 @}
36f63dca
NC
4795@end group
4796@group
252b5132
RH
4797 outputc :
4798 @{
4799 *(.input1)
4800 *(.input2)
4801 @}
4802@}
4803@end group
a1ab1d2a 4804@end smallexample
252b5132 4805
cbd0eecf
L
4806If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4807and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4808automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4809__stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4810indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4811respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4812C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4813
252b5132 4814@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4815@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4816@cindex data
4817@cindex section data
4818@cindex output section data
4819@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4820@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4821@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4822@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4823@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4824You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4825@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4826an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4827parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4828value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4829counter.
4830
4831The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4832store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4833bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4834stored.
4835
4836For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4837of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4838@smallexample
4839BYTE(1)
4840LONG(addr)
4841@end smallexample
4842
4843When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4844same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4845target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4846@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4847@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4848
4849If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4850which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4851When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4852true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4853endianness of the first input object file.
4854
36f63dca 4855Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4856between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4857@smallexample
4858SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4859@end smallexample
4860whereas this will work:
4861@smallexample
4862SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4863@end smallexample
4864
252b5132
RH
4865@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4866@cindex holes, filling
4867@cindex unspecified memory
4868You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4869current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4870otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4871gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4872with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4873necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4874point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4875than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4876different parts of an output section.
4877
4878This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4879value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4880@smallexample
563e308f 4881FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4882@end smallexample
4883
4884The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4885section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4886part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4887entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4888precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4889expression.
252b5132
RH
4890
4891@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4892@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4893There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4894commands.
4895
4896@table @code
4897@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4898@cindex input filename symbols
4899@cindex filename symbols
4900@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4901The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4902The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4903file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4904the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4905
4906This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4907normally used for any other object file format.
4908
4909@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4910@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4911@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4912@item CONSTRUCTORS
4913When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4914unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4915destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4916arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4917automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4918For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4919linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4920@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4921ignored for other object file formats.
4922
4923The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4924constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4925Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4926the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4927first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4928of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4929compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4930formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4931@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4932the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4933destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4934@code{exit}.
4935
4936For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4937arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4938addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4939and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4940linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4941runtime code expects to see.
4942
4943@smallexample
4944 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4945 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4946 *(.ctors)
4947 LONG(0)
4948 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4949 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4950 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4951 *(.dtors)
4952 LONG(0)
4953 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4954@end smallexample
4955
4956If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4957which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4958are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4959are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4960command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4961@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4962@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4963@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4964
4965Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4966and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4967need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4968scripts.
4969
4970@end table
4971
4972@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4973@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4974@cindex discarding sections
4975@cindex sections, discarding
4976@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4977The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4978This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4979may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4980@smallexample
49c13adb 4981.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4982@end smallexample
4983@noindent
4984will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4985@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4986sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4987space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4988too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4989space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4990@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4991@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4992This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4993
a0976ea4 4994The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4995on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4996symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4997the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4998section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4999
5000@cindex /DISCARD/
5001The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
5002input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
5003section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
5004
a2e098c3
NC
5005Note, sections that match the @samp{/DISCARD/} output section will be
5006discarded even if they are in an ELF section group which has other
5007members which are not being discarded. This is deliberate.
5008Discarding takes precedence over grouping.
5009
252b5132 5010@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 5011@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
5012@cindex output section attributes
5013We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
5014like this:
0c71d759 5015
252b5132 5016@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 5017@group
7e7d5768 5018@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 5019 [AT(@var{lma})]
3bbec4bd 5020 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
5021 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
5022 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
5023 @{
5024 @var{output-section-command}
5025 @var{output-section-command}
5026 @dots{}
562d3460 5027 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
5028@end group
5029@end smallexample
0c71d759 5030
252b5132
RH
5031We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
5032@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
5033remaining section attributes.
5034
a1ab1d2a 5035@menu
252b5132
RH
5036* Output Section Type:: Output section type
5037* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 5038* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 5039* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 5040* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
5041* Output Section Region:: Output section region
5042* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
5043* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
5044@end menu
5045
5046@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 5047@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
5048Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
5049parentheses. The following types are defined:
5050
5051@table @code
5052@item NOLOAD
5053The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
5054loaded into memory when the program is run.
5055@item DSECT
5056@itemx COPY
5057@itemx INFO
5058@itemx OVERLAY
5059These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
5060rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
5061marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
5062section when the program is run.
5063@end table
5064
5065@kindex NOLOAD
5066@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
5067@cindex loading, preventing
5068The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
5069the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
5070the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
5071@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 5072need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
5073@smallexample
5074@group
5075SECTIONS @{
5076 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
5077 @dots{}
5078@}
5079@end group
5080@end smallexample
5081
5082@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 5083@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 5084@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
5085@kindex AT(@var{lma})
5086@cindex load address
5087@cindex section load address
5088Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
5089@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
5090@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
5091specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
5092address is optional.
6bdafbeb 5093
ea5cae92
NC
5094The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
5095specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
5096takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
5097load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
5098region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
5099
5100If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
5101section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
5102load address:
5103
5104@itemize @bullet
5105@item
5106If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
5107the LMA address as well.
5108
5109@item
5110If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
5111
5112@item
5113Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
5114with the current section, and this region contains at least one
5115section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
5116VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
5117the last section in the located region.
5118
5119@item
5120If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
5121that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
5122
5123@item
5124If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
5125section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
5126@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5127
5128@cindex ROM initialized data
5129@cindex initialized data in ROM
5130This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
5131example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
5132called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
5133@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
5134even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
5135uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
5136defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
5137counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
5138
5139@smallexample
5140@group
5141SECTIONS
5142 @{
5143 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 5144 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
5145 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5146 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5147 .bss 0x3000 :
5148 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5149@}
5150@end group
5151@end smallexample
5152
5153The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5154this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5155the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5156how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5157script.
5158
5159@smallexample
5160@group
5161extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5162char *src = &_etext;
5163char *dst = &_data;
5164
ea5cae92
NC
5165/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5166while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 5167 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 5168
ea5cae92 5169/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
5170for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5171 *dst = 0;
5172@end group
5173@end smallexample
5174
bbf115d3
L
5175@node Forced Output Alignment
5176@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5177@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5178@cindex forcing output section alignment
5179@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 5180You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
5181alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5182intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 5183
7e7d5768
AM
5184@node Forced Input Alignment
5185@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5186@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5187@cindex forcing input section alignment
5188@cindex input section alignment
5189You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5190SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5191sections, whether larger or smaller.
5192
0c71d759
NC
5193@node Output Section Constraint
5194@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5195@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5196@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5197@cindex constraints on output sections
5198You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5199of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5200read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5201@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5202
252b5132 5203@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 5204@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
5205@kindex >@var{region}
5206@cindex section, assigning to memory region
5207@cindex memory regions and sections
5208You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5209using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5210
5211Here is a simple example:
5212@smallexample
5213@group
5214MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5215SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5216@end group
5217@end smallexample
5218
5219@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 5220@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
5221@kindex :@var{phdr}
5222@cindex section, assigning to program header
5223@cindex program headers and sections
5224You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5225using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5226one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5227assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5228@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5229linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5230
5231Here is a simple example:
5232@smallexample
5233@group
5234PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5235SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5236@end group
5237@end smallexample
5238
5239@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 5240@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
5241@kindex =@var{fillexp}
5242@cindex section fill pattern
5243@cindex fill pattern, entire section
5244You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5245@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5246(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5247within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
5248alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5249necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 5250of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
5251an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5252fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 5253other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
5254pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5255expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
5256
5257You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 5258output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
5259
5260Here is a simple example:
5261@smallexample
5262@group
563e308f 5263SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
5264@end group
5265@end smallexample
5266
5267@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 5268@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
5269@kindex OVERLAY
5270@cindex overlays
5271An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5272are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5273the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5274copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5275required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5276can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5277than another.
5278
5279Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5280@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5281output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5282command is as follows:
5283@smallexample
5284@group
5285OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5286 @{
5287 @var{secname1}
5288 @{
5289 @var{output-section-command}
5290 @var{output-section-command}
5291 @dots{}
5292 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5293 @var{secname2}
5294 @{
5295 @var{output-section-command}
5296 @var{output-section-command}
5297 @dots{}
5298 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5299 @dots{}
abc9061b 5300 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
5301@end group
5302@end smallexample
5303
5304Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5305section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5306section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 5307those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
5308except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5309sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5310
abc9061b
CC
5311The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5312the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5313
252b5132
RH
5314The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5315addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5316memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5317whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5318and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5319and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5320
56dd11f0
NC
5321If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5322references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5323the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5324sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5325@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
5326
5327For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 5328provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
5329defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5330@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5331the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5332within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5333symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5334
5335At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5336the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5337
5338Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5339@code{SECTIONS} construct.
5340@smallexample
5341@group
5342 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5343 @{
5344 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5345 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5346 @}
5347@end group
5348@end smallexample
5349@noindent
5350This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5351address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5352@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 5353following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
5354@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5355@code{__load_stop_text1}.
5356
5357C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5358like the following.
5359
5360@smallexample
5361@group
5362 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5363 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5364 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5365@end group
5366@end smallexample
5367
5368Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5369everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5370example could have been written identically as follows.
5371
5372@smallexample
5373@group
5374 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5375 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5376 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 5377 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5378 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5379 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
5380 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5381@end group
5382@end smallexample
5383
5384@node MEMORY
36f63dca 5385@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
5386@kindex MEMORY
5387@cindex memory regions
5388@cindex regions of memory
5389@cindex allocating memory
5390@cindex discontinuous memory
5391The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5392memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5393
5394The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5395memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5396may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5397can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5398set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5399regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5400around to fit into the available regions.
5401
127fcdff
AB
5402A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5403however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5404specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5405@code{MEMORY} is:
252b5132
RH
5406@smallexample
5407@group
a1ab1d2a 5408MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5409 @{
5410 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5411 @dots{}
5412 @}
5413@end group
5414@end smallexample
5415
5416The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5417region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5418Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5419with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
5420must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5421add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 5422command.
252b5132
RH
5423
5424@cindex memory region attributes
5425The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5426whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5427not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5428@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5429section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5430the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5431them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5432
5433The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5434@table @samp
5435@item R
5436Read-only section
5437@item W
5438Read/write section
5439@item X
5440Executable section
5441@item A
5442Allocatable section
5443@item I
5444Initialized section
5445@item L
5446Same as @samp{I}
5447@item !
c09e9a8c 5448Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
5449@end table
5450
81c688d5 5451If an unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
252b5132 5452@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
81c688d5
NC
5453attribute reverses the test for the characters that follow, so that an
5454unmapped section will be placed in the memory region only if it does
5455not match any of the attributes listed afterwards. Thus an attribute
5456string of @samp{RW!X} will match any unmapped section that has either
5457or both of the @samp{R} and @samp{W} attributes, but only as long as
5458the section does not also have the @samp{X} attribute.
252b5132
RH
5459
5460@kindex ORIGIN =
5461@kindex o =
5462@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
5463The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5464the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5465cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5466abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5467@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
5468
5469@kindex LENGTH =
5470@kindex len =
5471@kindex l =
5472The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5473region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
5474be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5475@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
5476
5477In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5478available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5479and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5480linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5481is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5482or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5483explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5484region.
5485
5486@smallexample
5487@group
a1ab1d2a 5488MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5489 @{
5490 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5491 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5492 @}
5493@end group
5494@end smallexample
5495
5496Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5497specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5498@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5499a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5500output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5501was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5502the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5503output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5504region, the linker will issue an error message.
5505
3ec57632 5506It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 5507expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
5508@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5509
5510@smallexample
5511@group
c0065db7 5512 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
5513@end group
5514@end smallexample
5515
252b5132
RH
5516@node PHDRS
5517@section PHDRS Command
5518@kindex PHDRS
5519@cindex program headers
5520@cindex ELF program headers
5521@cindex program segments
5522@cindex segments, ELF
5523The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5524@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5525loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5526program with the @samp{-p} option.
5527
5528When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5529reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5530program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5531This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5532interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5533
5534The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5535in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5536precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5537the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5538not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5539
5540The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5541generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5542ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5543
5544This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5545@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5546
5547@smallexample
5548@group
5549PHDRS
5550@{
5551 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5552 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5553@}
5554@end group
5555@end smallexample
5556
5557The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5558of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5559header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5560with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5561must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5562is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5563
5564Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5565system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5566specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5567sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5568attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5569Section Phdr}.
5570
5571It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5572merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5573repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5574contain the section.
5575
5576If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5577then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5578not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5579convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5580placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5581default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5582segment at all.
5583
5584@kindex FILEHDR
5585@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5586You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5587the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5588The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5589file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5590include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5591segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5592these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5593
5594The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5595value of the keyword.
5596
5597@table @asis
5598@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5599Indicates an unused program header.
5600
5601@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5602Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5603the file.
5604
5605@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5606Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5607
5608@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5609Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5610found.
5611
5612@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5613Indicates a segment holding note information.
5614
5615@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5616A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5617ABI.
5618
5619@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5620Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5621
1a9ccd70
NC
5622@item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5623Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5624
252b5132
RH
5625@item @var{expression}
5626An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5627be used for types not defined above.
5628@end table
5629
5630You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5631in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5632@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5633Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5634output section attribute.
5635
5636The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5637which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5638explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5639an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5640header.
5641
5642Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5643headers used on a native ELF system.
5644
5645@example
5646@group
5647PHDRS
5648@{
5649 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5650 interp PT_INTERP ;
5651 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5652 data PT_LOAD ;
5653 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5654@}
5655
5656SECTIONS
5657@{
5658 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5659 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5660 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5661 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5662 @dots{}
5663 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5664 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5665 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5666 @dots{}
5667@}
5668@end group
5669@end example
5670
5671@node VERSION
5672@section VERSION Command
5673@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5674@cindex symbol versions
5675@cindex version script
5676@cindex versions of symbols
5677The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5678only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5679symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5680a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5681shared library.
5682
5683You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5684you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5685also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5686
5687The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5688@smallexample
5689VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5690@end smallexample
5691
5692The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5693Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5694version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5695version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5696version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5697scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5698library.
5699
5700The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5701examples.
5702
5703@smallexample
5704VERS_1.1 @{
5705 global:
5706 foo1;
5707 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5708 old*;
5709 original*;
5710 new*;
252b5132
RH
5711@};
5712
5713VERS_1.2 @{
5714 foo2;
5715@} VERS_1.1;
5716
5717VERS_2.0 @{
5718 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5719 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5720 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5721 "f(int, double)";
5722 @};
252b5132
RH
5723@} VERS_1.2;
5724@end smallexample
5725
5726This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5727version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5728The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5729a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5730of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5731symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5732is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5733in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5734However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5735name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5736
5737Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5738depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5739to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5740
5741Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5742depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5743and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5744
5745When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5746specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5747unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5748unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5749somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5750wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5751wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5752set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5753ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5754
5755The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5756they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5757could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5758However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5759
0f6bf451 5760Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5761in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5762symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5763won't.
5764
5765@smallexample
7c9c73be 5766@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5767@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5768
252b5132
RH
5769When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5770symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5771requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5772shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5773loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5774linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5775application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5776way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5777all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5778search for each symbol reference.
5779
5780The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5781doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5782that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5783functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5784the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5785required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5786that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5787versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5788the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5789
5790There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5791first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5792source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5793script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5794maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5795@smallexample
5796__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5797@end smallexample
5798@noindent
5799in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5800be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5801The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5802@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5803takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5804
5805The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5806function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5807an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5808version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5809linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5810
5811To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5812source file. Here is an example:
5813
5814@smallexample
5815__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5816__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5817__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5818__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5819@end smallexample
5820
5821In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5822unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5823example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5824@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5825
5826When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5827some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5828this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5829@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5830declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5831you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5832
5833If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5834within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5835(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5836specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5837
cb840a31
L
5838You can also specify the language in the version script:
5839
5840@smallexample
5841VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5842@end smallexample
5843
c0065db7 5844The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5845The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5846demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5847patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5848@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5849
86043bbb
MM
5850Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5851described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5852or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5853the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5854whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5855cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5856might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5857should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5858expect when you upgrade.
5859
252b5132
RH
5860@node Expressions
5861@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5862@cindex expressions
5863@cindex arithmetic
5864The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5865that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5866expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5867host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5868
5869You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5870
5871The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5872expressions.
5873
5874@menu
5875* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5876* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5877* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5878* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5879* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5880* Operators:: Operators
5881* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5882* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5883* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5884@end menu
5885
5886@node Constants
5887@subsection Constants
5888@cindex integer notation
5889@cindex constants in linker scripts
5890All constants are integers.
5891
5892As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5893octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5894hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5895@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5896@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5897value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5898
5899@cindex scaled integers
5900@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5901@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5902@cindex suffixes for integers
5903@cindex integer suffixes
5904In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5905constant by
5906@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5907@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5908@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5909@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5910@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5911@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5912@tex
5913${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5914@end tex
5915@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5916respectively. For example, the following
5917all refer to the same quantity:
5918
252b5132 5919@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5920_fourk_1 = 4K;
5921_fourk_2 = 4096;
5922_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5923_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5924@end smallexample
5925
8a308ae8
NC
5926Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5927conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5928
0c71d759
NC
5929@node Symbolic Constants
5930@subsection Symbolic Constants
5931@cindex symbolic constants
5932@kindex CONSTANT
a094d01f 5933It is possible to refer to target-specific constants via the use of
0c71d759
NC
5934the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5935
5936@table @code
5937@item MAXPAGESIZE
5938@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5939The target's maximum page size.
5940
5941@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5942@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5943The target's default page size.
5944@end table
5945
5946So for example:
5947
5948@smallexample
9d5777a3 5949 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5950@end smallexample
5951
5952will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5953supported by the target.
5954
252b5132
RH
5955@node Symbols
5956@subsection Symbol Names
5957@cindex symbol names
5958@cindex names
5959@cindex quoted symbol names
5960@kindex "
5961Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5962and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5963Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5964specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5965keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5966@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5967"SECTION" = 9;
5968"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5969@end smallexample
5970
5971Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5972to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5973whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5974
ecca9871
L
5975@node Orphan Sections
5976@subsection Orphan Sections
5977@cindex orphan
5978Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5979are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5980script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
a87ded7b
AB
5981output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
5982in which to place the orphaned input section.
5983
5984If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
5985an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
5986placed at the end of that output section.
5987
5988If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
5989sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
5990name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
5991orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
5992one new output section.
5993
5994If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
5995then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
e299b355
AM
5996in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
5997linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
5998attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
5999sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
6000support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
ecca9871 6001
a05a5b64
TP
6002The command-line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
6003(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}) can be used to control which
c005eb9e
AB
6004output sections an orphan is placed in.
6005
252b5132
RH
6006@node Location Counter
6007@subsection The Location Counter
6008@kindex .
6009@cindex dot
6010@cindex location counter
6011@cindex current output location
6012The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
6013current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
6014location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
6015within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
6016anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
6017
6018@cindex holes
6019Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
6020moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
6021location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
6022and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
6023doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
6024
6025@smallexample
6026SECTIONS
6027@{
6028 output :
6029 @{
6030 file1(.text)
6031 . = . + 1000;
6032 file2(.text)
6033 . += 1000;
6034 file3(.text)
563e308f 6035 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
6036@}
6037@end smallexample
6038@noindent
6039In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
6040located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
6041followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
6042@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 6043@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
6044specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
6045
5c6bbab8
NC
6046@cindex dot inside sections
6047Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
6048current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 6049statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
6050absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
6051however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
6052not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
6053
6054@smallexample
6055SECTIONS
6056@{
6057 . = 0x100
6058 .text: @{
6059 *(.text)
6060 . = 0x200
6061 @}
6062 . = 0x500
6063 .data: @{
6064 *(.data)
6065 . += 0x600
6066 @}
6067@}
6068@end smallexample
6069
6070The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
6071and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
6072the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
6073much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
6074move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
6075and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
6076the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
6077the @samp{.data} output section itself.
6078
b5666f2f
AM
6079@cindex dot outside sections
6080Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
6081output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
6082needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
6083
6084@smallexample
6085SECTIONS
6086@{
6087 start_of_text = . ;
6088 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6089 end_of_text = . ;
6090
6091 start_of_data = . ;
6092 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6093 end_of_data = . ;
6094@}
6095@end smallexample
6096
6097If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
6098not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
6099between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
6100should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
6101blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
6102the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
6103sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
6104statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
6105special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
6106place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
6107as follows:
6108
6109@smallexample
6110SECTIONS
6111@{
6112 start_of_text = . ;
6113 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6114 end_of_text = . ;
6115
6116 start_of_data = . ;
6117 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
6118 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6119 end_of_data = . ;
6120@}
6121@end smallexample
6122
6123This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
6124@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
6125placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
6126assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
6127a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
6128section. So you could write:
6129
6130@smallexample
6131SECTIONS
6132@{
6133 start_of_text = . ;
6134 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6135 end_of_text = . ;
6136
6137 . = . ;
6138 start_of_data = . ;
6139 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6140 end_of_data = . ;
6141@}
6142@end smallexample
6143
6144Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6145@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6146
252b5132
RH
6147@need 2000
6148@node Operators
6149@subsection Operators
6150@cindex operators for arithmetic
6151@cindex arithmetic operators
6152@cindex precedence in expressions
6153The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6154the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6155@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6156@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6157@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6158@smallexample
6159precedence associativity Operators Notes
6160(highest)
61611 left ! - ~ (1)
61622 left * / %
61633 left + -
61644 left >> <<
61655 left == != > < <= >=
61666 left &
61677 left |
61688 left &&
61699 left ||
617010 right ? :
617111 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6172(lowest)
6173@end smallexample
6174Notes:
a1ab1d2a 6175(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
6176(2) @xref{Assignments}.
6177@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6178@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6179@tex
6180\vskip \baselineskip
6181%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6182\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6183\hrule
6184\halign
6185{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6186height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6187&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6188height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6189\noalign{\hrule}
6190height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6191&highest&&&&&\cr
6192% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 6193&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
6194&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6195&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6196&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6197&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6198&6&&left&&\&&\cr
6199&7&&left&&|&\cr
6200&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6201&9&&left&&||&\cr
6202&10&&right&&? :&\cr
6203&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6204&lowest&&&&&\cr
6205height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6206\hrule}
6207@end tex
6208@iftex
6209{
6210@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6211@dag@quad Prefix operators.
6212@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6213}
6214@end iftex
6215@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6216
6217@node Evaluation
6218@subsection Evaluation
6219@cindex lazy evaluation
6220@cindex expression evaluation order
6221The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6222an expression when absolutely necessary.
6223
6224The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6225address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6226regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6227as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6228
6229However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6230until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6231other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6232for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6233
6234The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6235assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6236allocation.
6237
6238Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6239@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6240
6241If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6242available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6243following
6244@smallexample
6245@group
6246SECTIONS
6247 @{
a1ab1d2a 6248 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
6249 @{ *(.text) @}
6250 @}
6251@end group
6252@end smallexample
6253@noindent
6254will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6255address}.
6256
6257@node Expression Section
6258@subsection The Section of an Expression
6259@cindex expression sections
6260@cindex absolute expressions
6261@cindex relative expressions
6262@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6263@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6264@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
6265Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6266relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6267using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6268value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6269symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6270operations.
6271
abf4be64
AM
6272Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6273section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6274address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6275@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6276functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
6277One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6278(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
6279differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6280versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6281section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6282Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
6283absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6284given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6285everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
6286
6287In the following simple example,
252b5132 6288
7542af2a
AM
6289@smallexample
6290@group
6291SECTIONS
6292 @{
6293 . = 0x100;
6294 __executable_start = 0x100;
6295 .data :
6296 @{
6297 . = 0x10;
6298 __data_start = 0x10;
6299 *(.data)
6300 @}
6301 @dots{}
6302 @}
6303@end group
6304@end smallexample
252b5132 6305
7542af2a
AM
6306both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6307address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6308@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6309section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 6310
5c3049d2
AM
6311For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6312addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
6313
6314@itemize @bullet
6315@item
c05f749e
AM
6316Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6317operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6318absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6319@item
7542af2a
AM
6320Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6321relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6322and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6323@item
c05f749e
AM
6324Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6325in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6326address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6327before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
6328@end itemize
6329
6330The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6331
6332@itemize @bullet
6333@item
6334An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6335@item
6336The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6337@item
9bc8bb33 6338The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 6339relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
94b41882
AM
6340(after above conversions) is also a number when
6341@code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6342but an absolute address otherwise.
9bc8bb33
AM
6343@item
6344The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6345relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6346section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
6347@item
6348The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6349conversions) is an absolute address.
6350@end itemize
252b5132
RH
6351
6352You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6353to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6354create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6355section @samp{.data}:
6356@smallexample
6357SECTIONS
6358 @{
6359 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6360 @}
6361@end smallexample
6362@noindent
6363If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6364@samp{.data} section.
6365
7542af2a
AM
6366Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6367particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6368
252b5132
RH
6369@node Builtin Functions
6370@subsection Builtin Functions
6371@cindex functions in expressions
6372The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6373use in linker script expressions.
6374
6375@table @code
6376@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6377@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6378@cindex expression, absolute
6379Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6380of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6381value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6382normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6383
6384@item ADDR(@var{section})
6385@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6386@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 6387Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 6388script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
6389the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6390@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6391@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6392the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
6393@smallexample
6394@group
6395SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6396 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 6397 @{
252b5132
RH
6398 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6399 @dots{}
6400 @}
6401 .output :
6402 @{
6403 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6404 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6405 @}
6406@dots{} @}
6407@end group
6408@end smallexample
6409
876f4090
NS
6410@item ALIGN(@var{align})
6411@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6412@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6413@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
6414@cindex round up location counter
6415@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
6416@cindex round up expression
6417@cindex align expression
6418Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6419to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6420doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6421arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6422expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
e0a3af22 6423equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
876f4090
NS
6424
6425Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6426next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6427variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6428input sections:
252b5132
RH
6429@smallexample
6430@group
6431SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6432 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6433 *(.data)
6434 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6435 @}
6436@dots{} @}
6437@end group
6438@end smallexample
6439@noindent
6440The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6441a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6442a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6443of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6444
6445The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6446
362c1d1a
NS
6447@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6448@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6449@cindex section alignment
6450Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6451been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6452evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6453the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6454value in that section.
6455@smallexample
6456@group
6457SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6458 .output @{
6459 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6460 @dots{}
6461 @}
6462@dots{} @}
6463@end group
6464@end smallexample
6465
252b5132
RH
6466@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6467@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6468This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6469scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6470section.
6471
2d20f7bf
JJ
6472@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6473@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6474This is equivalent to either
6475@smallexample
6476(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6477@end smallexample
6478or
6479@smallexample
fe6052e1
AM
6480(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6481 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
2d20f7bf
JJ
6482@end smallexample
6483@noindent
6484depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6485for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6486@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6487If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6488memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6489bytes in the on-disk file.
6490
6491This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6492any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6493@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
def5c83c
AM
6494be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for while still
6495running on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}. Note however
6496that @samp{-z relro} protection will not be effective if the system
6497page size is larger than @var{commonpagesize}.
2d20f7bf
JJ
6498
6499@noindent
6500Example:
6501@smallexample
6502 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6503@end smallexample
6504
6505@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6506@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6507This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6508evaluation purposes.
6509
6510@smallexample
6511 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6512@end smallexample
6513
a4f5ad88
JJ
6514@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6515@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6516This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 6517@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6518When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6519does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
def5c83c
AM
6520@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the @var{commonpagesize}
6521argument given to @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}. If present in the linker
6522script, it must be placed between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
6523@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6524padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6525section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6526
6527@smallexample
6528 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6529@end smallexample
6530
252b5132
RH
6531@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6532@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6533@cindex symbol defaults
6534Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6535defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6536return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6537default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6538shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6539the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6540existed, its value is preserved:
6541
6542@smallexample
6543@group
6544SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6545 .text : @{
6546 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6547 @dots{}
6548 @}
6549 @dots{}
6550@}
6551@end group
6552@end smallexample
6553
3ec57632
NC
6554@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6555@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6556Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6557
252b5132
RH
6558@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6559@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6560@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6561Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6562Section LMA}).
6563
2e53f7d6
NC
6564@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6565@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6566Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6567@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6568
252b5132
RH
6569@kindex MAX
6570@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6571Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6572
6573@kindex MIN
6574@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6575Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6576
6577@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6578@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6579@cindex unallocated address, next
6580Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6581This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6582use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6583output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6584
3ec57632
NC
6585@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6586@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6587Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6588
ba916c8a
MM
6589@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6590@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6591Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6592value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6593@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6594will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6595can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6596``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6597name.
6598
252b5132
RH
6599@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6600@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6601@cindex section size
6602Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6603been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6604evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6605@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6606@smallexample
6607@group
6608SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6609 .output @{
6610 .start = . ;
6611 @dots{}
6612 .end = . ;
6613 @}
6614 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6615 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6616@dots{} @}
6617@end group
6618@end smallexample
6619
6620@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6621@itemx sizeof_headers
6622@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6623@cindex header size
6624Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6625information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6626this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6627choose, to facilitate paging.
6628
6629@cindex not enough room for program headers
6630@cindex program headers, not enough room
6631When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6632@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6633number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6634addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6635additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6636room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6637the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6638script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6639you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6640command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6641@end table
6642
6643@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6644@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6645@cindex implicit linker scripts
6646If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6647an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6648linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6649linker will report an error.
6650
6651An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6652
6653Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6654assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6655commands.
6656
6657Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6658at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6659read. This can affect archive searching.
6660
6661@ifset GENERIC
6662@node Machine Dependent
6663@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6664
6665@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6666@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6667sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6668functionality are not listed.
6669
6670@menu
36f63dca
NC
6671@ifset H8300
6672* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6673@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6674@ifset M68HC11
6675* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6676@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6677@ifset ARM
6678* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6679@end ifset
6680@ifset HPPA
6681* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6682@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6683@ifset M68K
6684* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6685@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6686@ifset MIPS
6687* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6688@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6689@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6690* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6691@end ifset
2469cfa2 6692@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6693* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6694@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6695@ifset NDS32
6696* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6697@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6698@ifset NIOSII
6699* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6700@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6701@ifset POWERPC
6702* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6703@end ifset
6704@ifset POWERPC64
6705* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6706@end ifset
b4cbbe8f
AK
6707@ifset S/390
6708* S/390 ELF:: @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
6709@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6710@ifset SPU
6711* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6712@end ifset
74459f0e 6713@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6714* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6715@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6716@ifset WIN32
6717* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6718@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6719@ifset XTENSA
6720* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6721@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6722@end menu
6723@end ifset
6724
252b5132
RH
6725@ifset H8300
6726@ifclear GENERIC
6727@raisesections
6728@end ifclear
6729
6730@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6731@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6732
6733@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6734For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6735you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6736
6737@table @emph
6738@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6739@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6740@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6741targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6742program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6743respectively.
6744
6745@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6746@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6747@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6748@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6749sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6750page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6751(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6752@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6753top page of memory).
1502569c 6754
81f5558e
NC
6755@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6756indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6757displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6758the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6759@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6760whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6761range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6762
1502569c 6763@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6764@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6765biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6766which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6767page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6768(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6769@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6770the top page of memory).
6771
6772@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6773@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
677432 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6775changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6776(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6777@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6778the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6779@end table
6780
6781@ifclear GENERIC
6782@lowersections
6783@end ifclear
6784@end ifset
6785
36f63dca 6786@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6787@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6788@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6789@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6790@node Renesas
6791@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6792
c2dcd04e
NC
6793@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6794H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6795options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6796@end ifset
6797@end ifclear
6798
36f63dca
NC
6799@ifset ARM
6800@ifclear GENERIC
6801@raisesections
6802@end ifclear
6803
93fd0973
SC
6804@ifset M68HC11
6805@ifclear GENERIC
6806@raisesections
6807@end ifclear
6808
6809@node M68HC11/68HC12
6810@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6811
6812@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6813
6814@subsection Linker Relaxation
6815
6816For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6817optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6818
6819@table @emph
6820@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6821@item relaxing address modes
6822@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6823targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6824program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6825respectively.
6826
6827@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6828transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6829page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6830
6831@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6832When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6833of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6834addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6835@code{bset} instructions.
6836
6837@end table
6838
6839@subsection Trampoline Generation
6840
6841@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6842@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6843For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6844call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6845will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6846trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6847case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6848point to the function trampoline.
6849
6850@ifclear GENERIC
6851@lowersections
6852@end ifclear
6853@end ifset
6854
36f63dca 6855@node ARM
3674e28a 6856@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6857
6858@cindex ARM interworking support
6859@kindex --support-old-code
6860For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6861between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6862been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6863line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6864libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
a05a5b64 6865option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command-line switch should be
36f63dca
NC
6866given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6867which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6868the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6869non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6870
6871@cindex thumb entry point
6872@cindex entry point, thumb
6873@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6874The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6875@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6876But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6877branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6878executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6879
ce11ba6c
KT
6880@cindex PE import table prefixing
6881@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6882The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6883the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6884element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6885import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6886
e489d0ae
PB
6887@cindex BE8
6888@kindex --be8
6889The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
080bb7bb
NC
6890executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6891objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6892option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6893little-endian code.
e489d0ae 6894
3674e28a
PB
6895@cindex TARGET1
6896@kindex --target1-rel
6897@kindex --target1-abs
6898The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6899@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6900or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6901and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6902
6903@cindex TARGET2
6904@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6905The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6906@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6907meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6908@table @samp
6909@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6910@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6911@item abs
6912@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6913@item got-rel
6914@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6915@end table
6916
319850b4
JB
6917@cindex FIX_V4BX
6918@kindex --fix-v4bx
6919The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6920specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6921interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6922also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6923
6924In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6925linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6926@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6927
6928In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6929relocations are ignored.
6930
845b51d6
PB
6931@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6932@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6933Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6934relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6935
6936@smallexample
6937TST rM, #1
6938MOVEQ PC, rM
6939BX Rn
6940@end smallexample
6941
6942This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6943and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6944condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6945
33bfe774
JB
6946@cindex USE_BLX
6947@kindex --use-blx
6948The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6949BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6950situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6951code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6952each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6953
6954This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6955specify it if you are using that target.
6956
c6dd86c6
JB
6957@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6958@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6959The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6960bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6961instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6962to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6963the support code can read the intended values.
6964
6965The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6966intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6967and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6968intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6969full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6970you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6971
6972If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6973enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6974@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6975mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6976vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6977@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6978
6979If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6980potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6981such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6982first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6983instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6984the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6985are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6986
2de70689
MGD
6987@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6988@kindex --fix-arm1176
6989@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6990The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6991in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6992are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6993unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6994
9d5777a3 6995Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6996Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6997http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6998
a504d23a
LA
6999@cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
7000@kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
7001
7002The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
7003workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
7004the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
7005off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
7006the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
7007core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
7008integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
7009VPOP. Stores are not affected.
7010
7011The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
7012necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
7013
7014The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
7015@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
7016STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
7017linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
7018@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
7019
7020If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
7021potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
7022such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
7023replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
7024branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
7025then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
7026
7027The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
7028the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
7029
7030The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
7031they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
7032there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7033occurs.
7034
7035The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
7036PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
7037large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
7038cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7039occurs.
7040
bf21ed78
MS
7041@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
7042@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 7043The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
7044warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7045enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7046linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
7047using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
7048not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
7049
7050@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
7051@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
7052The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
7053warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7054@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7055linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
7056using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 7057
726150b7
NC
7058@cindex PIC_VENEER
7059@kindex --pic-veneer
7060The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
7061ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
7062is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
7063@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
7064
7065@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
7066@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7067The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
7068code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
7069perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
7070placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
a05a5b64 7071controlled by the command-line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
726150b7 7072The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 7073duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
7074group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
7075code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
7076where they should be placed.
7077
7078The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
7079@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 7080placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
7081branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
7082placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
7083value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
7084exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
7085A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
7086linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
7087from the input sections.
7088
7089The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
7090@samp{N = +1}.
7091
1a51c1a4
NC
7092Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
7093only, because it relies on object files properties not present
7094otherwise.
7095
1db37fe6
YG
7096@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
7097@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
7098@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7099The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7100
7101The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7102
68fcca92
JW
7103@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7104@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7105@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7106The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7107
7108Please contact ARM for further details.
7109
1db37fe6
YG
7110@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7111@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7112@cindex Merging exidx entries
7113The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7114
7115@kindex --long-plt
7116@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7117The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7118which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7119entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7120
1f56df9d
JW
7121@kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7122@cindex AArch64 rela addend
7123The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7124link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7125
4ba2ef8f
TP
7126@cindex Placement of SG veneers
7127All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
a05a5b64 7128Its start address must be set, either with the command-line option
4ba2ef8f
TP
7129@samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7130veneers in memory.
7131
54ddd295
TP
7132@kindex --cmse-implib
7133@cindex Secure gateway import library
7134The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7135specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7136secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7137executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7138
0955507f
TP
7139@kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7140@cindex Input import library
7141The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7142must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7143given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7144in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7145@samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7146library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7147library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7148for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7149specified.
7150
36f63dca
NC
7151@ifclear GENERIC
7152@lowersections
7153@end ifclear
7154@end ifset
7155
7156@ifset HPPA
7157@ifclear GENERIC
7158@raisesections
7159@end ifclear
7160
7161@node HPPA ELF32
7162@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7163@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7164@kindex --multi-subspace
7165When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7166import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7167The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7168stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7169multiple sub-spaces.
7170
7171@cindex HPPA stub grouping
7172@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7173Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7174stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7175@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7176sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7177a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7178the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7179conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7180prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7181A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7182branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7183@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7184@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7185detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7186positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7187
7188Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7189single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7190create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7191large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7192
7193@ifclear GENERIC
7194@lowersections
7195@end ifclear
7196@end ifset
7197
7fb9f789
NC
7198@ifset M68K
7199@ifclear GENERIC
7200@raisesections
7201@end ifclear
7202
7203@node M68K
7204@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7205
7206@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7207@kindex --got=@var{type}
7208The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7209The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7210@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7211the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7212@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7213entries only at non-negative offsets.
7214@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7215entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7216support such GOTs.
7217@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7218output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7219file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7220files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7221
7222@ifclear GENERIC
7223@lowersections
7224@end ifclear
7225@end ifset
7226
833794fc
MR
7227@ifset MIPS
7228@ifclear GENERIC
7229@raisesections
7230@end ifclear
7231
7232@node MIPS
7233@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7234
7235@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7236@kindex --insn32
7237@kindex --no-insn32
7238The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7239microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7240in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7241used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7242or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7243including 16-bit ones where possible.
7244
8b10b0b3
MR
7245@cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7246@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7247@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7248The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7249control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7250@samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7251relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7252calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7253relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7254instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7255or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7256the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7257
833794fc
MR
7258@ifclear GENERIC
7259@lowersections
7260@end ifclear
7261@end ifset
7262
36f63dca
NC
7263@ifset MMIX
7264@ifclear GENERIC
7265@raisesections
7266@end ifclear
7267
7268@node MMIX
7269@section @code{ld} and MMIX
7270For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7271@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7272understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7273can translate between the two formats.
7274
7275There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7276Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7277registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7278equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7279@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7280global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7281this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7282symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7283
7a2de473
HPN
7284Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7285@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7286The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7287of a section.
36f63dca
NC
7288
7289Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7290are left out from an mmo file.
7291
7292@ifclear GENERIC
7293@lowersections
7294@end ifclear
7295@end ifset
7296
7297@ifset MSP430
7298@ifclear GENERIC
7299@raisesections
7300@end ifclear
7301
7302@node MSP430
7303@section @code{ld} and MSP430
7304For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7305will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7306just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7307
7308@cindex MSP430 extra sections
7309The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7310
7311@table @code
7312@item @samp{.vectors}
7313Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7314
7315@item @samp{.bootloader}
7316Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7317in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7318
7319@item @samp{.infomem}
7320Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7321this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7322
c0065db7 7323@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
7324This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7325in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7326
7327@item @samp{.noinit}
7328Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7329
c0065db7 7330The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
7331@end table
7332
7ef3addb
JL
7333@table @option
7334@cindex MSP430 Options
7335@kindex --code-region
7336@item --code-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7337This will transform .text* sections to [either,lower,upper].text* sections. The
7338argument passed to GCC for -mcode-region is propagated to the linker
7339using this option.
7340
7341@kindex --data-region
7342@item --data-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7343This will transform .data*, .bss* and .rodata* sections to
7344[either,lower,upper].[data,bss,rodata]* sections. The argument passed to GCC
7345for -mdata-region is propagated to the linker using this option.
7346
7347@kindex --disable-sec-transformation
7348@item --disable-sec-transformation
7349Prevent the transformation of sections as specified by the @code{--code-region}
7350and @code{--data-region} options.
7351This is useful if you are compiling and linking using a single call to the GCC
7352wrapper, and want to compile the source files using -m[code,data]-region but
7353not transform the sections for prebuilt libraries and objects.
7354@end table
7355
36f63dca
NC
7356@ifclear GENERIC
7357@lowersections
7358@end ifclear
7359@end ifset
7360
35c08157
KLC
7361@ifset NDS32
7362@ifclear GENERIC
7363@raisesections
7364@end ifclear
7365
7366@node NDS32
7367@section @code{ld} and NDS32
7368@kindex relaxing on NDS32
7369For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7370relaxes objects according to these options.
7371
7372@table @code
7373@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7374Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7375
7376@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7377Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7378
7379@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7380Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7381
7382@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7383Export the EX9 table after linking.
7384
7385@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7386Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7387
7388@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7389Update the existing EX9 table.
7390
7391@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7392Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7393
7394@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7395Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7396
7397@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7398Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7399
7400@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7401Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7402@end table
7403
7404@ifclear GENERIC
7405@lowersections
7406@end ifclear
7407@end ifset
7408
78058a5e
SL
7409@ifset NIOSII
7410@ifclear GENERIC
7411@raisesections
7412@end ifclear
7413
7414@node Nios II
7415@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7416@cindex Nios II call relaxation
7417@kindex --relax on Nios II
7418
7419Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7420transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7421which may result in @command{ld} giving
7422@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7423The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7424trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7425outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7426trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7427be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7428larger than 256MB.
7429
7430The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7431is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7432@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7433locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7434source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7435register as a temporary.
7436
7437Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7438relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7439option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7440
7441@ifclear GENERIC
7442@lowersections
7443@end ifclear
7444@end ifset
7445
2a60a7a8
AM
7446@ifset POWERPC
7447@ifclear GENERIC
7448@raisesections
7449@end ifclear
7450
7451@node PowerPC ELF32
7452@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7453@cindex PowerPC long branches
7454@kindex --relax on PowerPC
7455Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7456displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7457@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7458@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7459the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7460section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
7461section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7462@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7463both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7464considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
7465
7466@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7467@table @option
7468@cindex PowerPC PLT
7469@kindex --bss-plt
7470@item --bss-plt
7471Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7472generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7473the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7474writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7475@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7476PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7477compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7478BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7479
016687f8
AM
7480@kindex --secure-plt
7481@item --secure-plt
7482@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7483@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7484when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7485layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7486style BSS PLT.
7487
2a60a7a8
AM
7488@cindex PowerPC GOT
7489@kindex --sdata-got
7490@item --sdata-got
7491The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7492sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7493@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7494section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7495@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7496@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7497@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7498@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7499PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7500pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7501GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7502really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7503
7504@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7505@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7506@item --emit-stub-syms
7507This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7508symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7509
7510@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7511@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7512@item --no-tls-optimize
7513PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7514sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7515disable the optimization.
7516@end table
7517
7518@ifclear GENERIC
7519@lowersections
7520@end ifclear
7521@end ifset
7522
7523@ifset POWERPC64
7524@ifclear GENERIC
7525@raisesections
7526@end ifclear
7527
7528@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7529@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7530
7531@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7532@table @option
7533@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7534@kindex --stub-group-size
7535@item --stub-group-size
7536Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7537by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7538@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7539sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7540a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7541the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7542conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7543prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7544A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7545branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7546@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7547@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7548detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7549positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7550
7551Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7552single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7553create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7554large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7555
7556@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7557@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7558@item --emit-stub-syms
7559This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7560symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7561
7562@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7563@kindex --dotsyms
7564@kindex --no-dotsyms
95421fb9
AM
7565@item --dotsyms
7566@itemx --no-dotsyms
2a60a7a8
AM
7567These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7568in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7569function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7570code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7571properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7572to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7573@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7574dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7575feature.
7576
7ae4ea7d
AM
7577@cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7578@kindex --save-restore-funcs
7579@kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
95421fb9
AM
7580@item --save-restore-funcs
7581@itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7ae4ea7d
AM
7582These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7583provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7584@samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7585function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7586link.
7587
2a60a7a8
AM
7588@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7589@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7590@item --no-tls-optimize
7591PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7592sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7593disable the optimization.
7594
7c9cf415
AM
7595@cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7596@kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7597@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
95421fb9
AM
7598@item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7599@itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7c9cf415
AM
7600These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7601stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7602an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7603@code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7604stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7605option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7606Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7607slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7608application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7609normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7610
2a60a7a8
AM
7611@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7612@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7613@item --no-opd-optimize
7614PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7615corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7616the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7617Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7618
7619@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7620@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7621@item --non-overlapping-opd
7622Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7623@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7624the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7625entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7626
7627@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7628@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7629@item --no-toc-optimize
7630PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7631entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7632reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7633marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7634marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7635relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7636unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7637reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7638discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7639reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7640code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7641optimization.
7642
7643@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7644@kindex --no-multi-toc
7645@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7646If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7647@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7648where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7649entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7650total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7651grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7652TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7653calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7654help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
765564K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7656Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7657
7658@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7659@kindex --no-toc-sort
7660@item --no-toc-sort
7661By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7662happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7663placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7664with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7665referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7666@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7667results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7668off this feature.
7669
7670@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7671@kindex --plt-align
7672@kindex --no-plt-align
7673@item --plt-align
7674@itemx --no-plt-align
7675Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
2420fff6
AM
7676aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7677boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. A negative value may be
7678specified to pad PLT call stubs so that they do not cross the
7679specified power of two boundary (or the minimum number of boundaries
7680if a PLT stub is so large that it must cross a boundary). By default
7681PLT call stubs are aligned to 32-byte boundaries.
794e51c0
AM
7682
7683@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7684@kindex --plt-static-chain
7685@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7686@item --plt-static-chain
7687@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7688Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7689chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7690chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7691
7692@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7693@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7694@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7695@item --plt-thread-safe
1be5d8d3 7696@itemx --no-plt-thread-safe
794e51c0
AM
7697With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7698lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7699another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7700order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7701memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7702barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7703looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7704seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7705default behaviour.
8b5f1ed8
AM
7706
7707@cindex PowerPC64 ELFv2 PLT localentry optimization
7708@kindex --plt-localentry
7709@kindex --no-plt-localentry
7710@item --plt-localentry
7711@itemx --no-localentry
7712ELFv2 functions with localentry:0 are those with a single entry point,
7713ie. global entry == local entry, and that have no requirement on r2
7714(the TOC/GOT pointer) or r12, and guarantee r2 is unchanged on return.
7715Such an external function can be called via the PLT without saving r2
7716or restoring it on return, avoiding a common load-hit-store for small
7717functions. The optimization is attractive, with up to 40% reduction
7718in execution time for a small function, but can result in symbol
d44c746a
AM
7719interposition failures. Also, minor changes in a shared library,
7720including system libraries, can cause a function that was localentry:0
7721to become localentry:8. This will result in a dynamic loader
7722complaint and failure to run. The option is experimental, use with
7723care. @option{--no-plt-localentry} is the default.
2a60a7a8
AM
7724@end table
7725
7726@ifclear GENERIC
7727@lowersections
7728@end ifclear
7729@end ifset
7730
b4cbbe8f
AK
7731@ifset S/390
7732@ifclear GENERIC
7733@raisesections
7734@end ifclear
7735
7736@node S/390 ELF
7737@section @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
7738
7739@cindex S/390 ELF options
7740@table @option
7741
7742@cindex S/390
7743@kindex --s390-pgste
7744@item --s390-pgste
7745This option marks the result file with a @code{PT_S390_PGSTE}
7746segment. The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
7747binaries marked that way.
7748@end table
7749
7750@ifclear GENERIC
7751@lowersections
7752@end ifclear
7753@end ifset
7754
49fa1e15
AM
7755@ifset SPU
7756@ifclear GENERIC
7757@raisesections
7758@end ifclear
7759
7760@node SPU ELF
7761@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7762
7763@cindex SPU ELF options
7764@table @option
7765
7766@cindex SPU plugins
7767@kindex --plugin
7768@item --plugin
7769This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7770
7771@cindex SPU overlays
7772@kindex --no-overlays
7773@item --no-overlays
7774Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7775regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7776@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7777turns off all this special overlay handling.
7778
7779@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7780@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7781@item --emit-stub-syms
7782This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7783symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7784
7785@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7786@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7787@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7788This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7789function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7790on calls to non-overlay regions.
7791
7792@cindex SPU local store size
7793@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7794@item --local-store=lo:hi
7795@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7796the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7797range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7798
c0065db7 7799@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7800@kindex --stack-analysis
7801@item --stack-analysis
7802SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7803unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7804under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7805@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7806@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7807determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7808for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7809for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7810for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7811find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7812and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7813under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7814dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7815is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7816and calls will be given.
7817
c0065db7 7818@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7819@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7820@item --emit-stack-syms
7821This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7822in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7823These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7824functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7825functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7826such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7827The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7828@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7829@end table
7830
7831@ifclear GENERIC
7832@lowersections
7833@end ifclear
7834@end ifset
7835
36f63dca
NC
7836@ifset TICOFF
7837@ifclear GENERIC
7838@raisesections
7839@end ifclear
7840
7841@node TI COFF
7842@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7843@cindex TI COFF versions
7844@kindex --format=@var{version}
7845The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7846TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7847also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7848format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7849header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7850
7851@ifclear GENERIC
7852@lowersections
7853@end ifclear
7854@end ifset
7855
2ca22b03
NC
7856@ifset WIN32
7857@ifclear GENERIC
7858@raisesections
7859@end ifclear
7860
7861@node WIN32
7862@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7863
c0065db7 7864This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
a05a5b64
TP
7865See @ref{Options,,Command-line Options} for detailed description of the
7866command-line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7867
7868@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7869@cindex import libraries
7870@item import libraries
69da35b5 7871The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7872libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7873regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7874archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03 7875support for creating such libraries provided with the
a05a5b64 7876@samp{--out-implib} command-line option.
2ca22b03 7877
c0065db7
RM
7878@item exporting DLL symbols
7879@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7880The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7881
7882@table @emph
7883@item using auto-export functionality
7884@cindex using auto-export functionality
7885By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
a05a5b64 7886which is controlled by the following command-line options:
dc8465bf 7887
0a5d968e
NC
7888@itemize
7889@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7890@item --exclude-symbols
7891@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7892@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7893@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7894@end itemize
7895
09e2aba4
DK
7896When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7897(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7898symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7899often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7900private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7901options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7902exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7903final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7904
7905If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7906command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7907if either of the following are true:
7908
7909@itemize
7910@item A DEF file is used.
7911@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7912@end itemize
dc8465bf 7913
c0065db7
RM
7914@item using a DEF file
7915@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7916Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7917an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7918exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7919name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7920command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7921
7922@example
7923gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7924@end example
7925
0a5d968e
NC
7926Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7927@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7928
dc8465bf
NC
7929Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7930
7931@example
4b5bd4e7 7932LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7933
7934EXPORTS
7935foo
7936bar
7937_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7938another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7939var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7940doo = foo == foo2
7941eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7942@end example
dc8465bf 7943
7fcab871 7944This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7945symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7946alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7947by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7948@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7949@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7950export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7951in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7952symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7953
6b31ad16
DS
7954The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7955name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7956the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7957
b45619c0
NC
7958When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7959library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7960@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7961executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7962
7963With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7964specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7965non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7966
7967If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7968or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7969filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7970
4b5bd4e7
DS
7971The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7972
7973@example
7974EXPORTS
7975 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7976 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7977 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7978@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7979
7980Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7981@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7982@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7983@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7984Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7985@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7986string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7987
7988The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7989
7990@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7991will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7992by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7993linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7994library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7995
7996@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7997The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7998the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7999@code{*_imp__foo}).
8000
8001@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
8002well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
8003read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
8004variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
8005the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
8006extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
8007application will behave unexpectedly.
8008
8009@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
8010it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
8011symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
de194d85 8012API at runtime or by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
4b5bd4e7 8013the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 8014
4b5bd4e7
DS
8015See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
8016other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
8017
8018@cindex creating a DEF file
8019While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
a05a5b64 8020with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command-line option.
0a5d968e
NC
8021
8022@item Using decorations
8023@cindex Using decorations
8024Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
8025itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
8026declared as:
8027
8028@example
8029__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
8030__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
8031@end example
8032
8033All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
8034any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
8035this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
8036the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
8037
8038Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 8039decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
8040instead:
8041
8042@example
8043__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
8044__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
8045@end example
8046
c0065db7
RM
8047This complicates the structure of library header files, because
8048when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
8049variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
8050code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 8051of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
8052omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
8053@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 8054information.
c0065db7 8055@end table
dc8465bf 8056
2ca22b03
NC
8057@cindex automatic data imports
8058@item automatic data imports
8059The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 8060by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 8061compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 8062issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 8063code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 8064c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 8065initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 8066decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 8067platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
8068command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
8069The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
8070suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
8071trigger the feature's use.
8072
c0065db7 8073auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
8074additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
8075
c0065db7 8076"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
8077documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
8078
c0065db7
RM
8079The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
8080occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
8081One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
8082below.
8083
8084@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
8085For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
8086object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
8087offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
8088field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
8089in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 8090without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 8091The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
8092references.
8093
c0065db7
RM
8094The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
8095be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
8096themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
8097runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
8098compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
8099support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
8100run without error on an older system.
8101
c0065db7
RM
8102@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
8103enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
8104
8105@cindex direct linking to a dll
8106@item direct linking to a dll
8107The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
8108including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 8109libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 8110traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
8111libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
8112function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
8113though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 8114storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 8115tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
8116large or complex libraries when using import libs.
8117
c0065db7 8118Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 8119@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 8120of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
8121perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
8122select the dll instead of an import library.
8123
2ca22b03 8124
69da35b5
NC
8125For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
8126to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
8127
8128@example
45e948fe
NC
8129libxxx.dll.a
8130xxx.dll.a
8131libxxx.a
8132xxx.lib
f6c4d4b1 8133libxxx.lib
69da35b5 8134cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
8135libxxx.dll
8136xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
8137@end example
8138
69da35b5
NC
8139before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
8140
c0065db7
RM
8141(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
8142where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
8143@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
8144file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
8145@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
8146
c0065db7
RM
8147Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
8148@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
8149was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
8150various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
8151could coexist on the same machine.
8152
2ca22b03
NC
8153The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
8154applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 8155libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
8156
8157@example
8158bin/
8159 cygxxx.dll
8160lib/
8161 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 8162 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
8163@end example
8164
c0065db7
RM
8165Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8166done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
8167
81681. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8169@example
8170gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8171@end example
2ca22b03 8172
69da35b5
NC
8173However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8174(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8175@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8176not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8177
2ca22b03
NC
81782. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8179directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8180should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8181making the app/dll.
8182
8183@example
8184ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 8185@end example
2ca22b03
NC
8186
8187Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8188
8189@example
8190gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8191@end example
69da35b5
NC
8192
8193This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8194perfectly legal
8195
8196@example
8197bin/
8198 cygxxx-5.dll
8199lib/
c0065db7 8200 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
8201@end example
8202
dc8465bf 8203Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
8204even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8205@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8206
8207Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 8208wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
8209
82101. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8211work with auto-imported data.
8212
dc8465bf
NC
82132. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8214import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8215symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8216for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8217possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 8218
45e948fe
NC
82193. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8220critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8221in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8222stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8223
69da35b5 8224So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
8225true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8226a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8227binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
8228massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8229requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8230will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 8231
c0065db7 8232@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 8233@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
8234@item adding additional names
8235Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
8236A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8237exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8238when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 8239import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 8240
c0065db7 8241@example
dc8465bf
NC
8242LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8243
8244EXPORTS
c0065db7 8245foo
dc8465bf 8246_foo = foo
c0065db7 8247@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8248
8249The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8250
8251Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8252source code using the "weak" attribute:
8253
c0065db7
RM
8254@example
8255void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 8256void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 8257@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8258
8259See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8260symbols.
8261
8262@item renaming symbols
8263Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 8264kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
8265@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8266DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 8267created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 8268
c0065db7 8269@example
dc8465bf
NC
8270LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8271
8272EXPORTS
8273_foo = foo
c0065db7 8274@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8275
8276The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8277@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 8278@end table
dc8465bf 8279
0a5d968e 8280Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
a05a5b64 8281unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command-line option is used.
0a5d968e 8282If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
8283@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8284that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8285@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8286renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8287to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8288the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8289In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 8290which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
8291
8292@cindex weak externals
8293@item weak externals
8294The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8295weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8296defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8297are three variants of weak externals:
8298@itemize
8299@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8300called lazy externals.
8301@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8302This form is not presently implemented.
8303@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8304implemented.
8305@end itemize
8306As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8307are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8308uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
8309
8310@cindex aligned common symbols
8311@item aligned common symbols
8312As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8313desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8314the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8315carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8316by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8317tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8318but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8319warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 8320
2ca22b03
NC
8321@end table
8322
8323@ifclear GENERIC
8324@lowersections
8325@end ifclear
8326@end ifset
8327
e0001a05
NC
8328@ifset XTENSA
8329@ifclear GENERIC
8330@raisesections
8331@end ifclear
8332
8333@node Xtensa
8334@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8335
8336@cindex Xtensa processors
8337The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8338@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8339specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8340keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8341example, with the command:
8342
8343@smallexample
8344SECTIONS
8345@{
8346 .text : @{
8347 *(.literal .text)
8348 @}
8349@}
8350@end smallexample
8351
8352@noindent
8353@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8354and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8355literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8356interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8357group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8358files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8359and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 8360
43cd72b9 8361@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 8362@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
8363Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8364provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8365is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8366literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8367will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8368location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8369the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8370unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8371@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8372range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8373
8374For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8375to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8376instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8377instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8378instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8379@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8380hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8381By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8382switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8383density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8384instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8385performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8386linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8387a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8388
8389The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8390control the linker:
8391
8392@cindex Xtensa options
8393@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
8394@item --size-opt
8395When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8396more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8397no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8398alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8399preserve the correctness of the code.
8400@end table
e0001a05
NC
8401
8402@ifclear GENERIC
8403@lowersections
8404@end ifclear
8405@end ifset
8406
252b5132
RH
8407@ifclear SingleFormat
8408@node BFD
8409@chapter BFD
8410
8411@cindex back end
8412@cindex object file management
8413@cindex object formats available
8414@kindex objdump -i
8415The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8416These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8417object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8418format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8419it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8420associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8421object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8422(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8423list all the formats available for your configuration.
8424
8425@cindex BFD requirements
8426@cindex requirements for BFD
8427As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8428several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8429BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8430formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8431been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8432BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8433may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8434
8435One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8436mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8437useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8438conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8439
8440@menu
8441* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8442@end menu
8443
8444@node BFD outline
36f63dca 8445@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
8446@cindex opening object files
8447@include bfdsumm.texi
8448@end ifclear
8449
8450@node Reporting Bugs
8451@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
8452@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8453@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 8454
ff5dcc92 8455Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
8456
8457Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8458it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 8459to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 8460work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 8461@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8462
8463In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8464information that enables us to fix the bug.
8465
8466@menu
8467* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8468* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8469@end menu
8470
8471@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 8472@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
8473@cindex bug criteria
8474
8475If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8476
8477@itemize @bullet
8478@cindex fatal signal
8479@cindex linker crash
8480@cindex crash of linker
8481@item
8482If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 8483@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
8484
8485@cindex error on valid input
8486@item
ff5dcc92 8487If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
8488
8489@cindex invalid input
8490@item
ff5dcc92 8491If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
8492may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8493object files are correct.
8494
8495@item
8496If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 8497improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
8498@end itemize
8499
8500@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 8501@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 8502@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 8503@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
8504
8505A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 8506products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
8507recommend you contact that organization first.
8508
8509You can find contact information for many support companies and
8510individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8511distribution.
8512
ad22bfe8 8513@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 8514Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
8515@value{BUGURL}.
8516@end ifset
252b5132
RH
8517
8518The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8519@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8520fact or leave it out, state it!
8521
8522Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8523problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
8524assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8525matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8526the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8527location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8528were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8529into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8530specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 8531and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
8532
8533Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8534the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8535on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
8536
8537Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
8538bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8539respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8540You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
8541
8542To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8543
8544@itemize @bullet
8545@item
ff5dcc92 8546The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
8547the @samp{--version} argument.
8548
8549Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 8550the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8551
8552@item
ff5dcc92 8553Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
8554patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8555
8556@item
8557The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8558version number.
8559
8560@item
ff5dcc92 8561What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
8562``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8563
8564@item
8565The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8566observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8567list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8568sufficient.
8569
8570If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8571and then we might not encounter the bug.
8572
8573@item
8574A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
8575bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8576provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8577bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8578state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8579requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8580we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8581attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
8582
8583If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8584@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8585object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8586@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8587how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8588
8589@item
8590A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8591incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8592
ff5dcc92 8593Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
8594will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8595not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8596a chance to make a mistake.
8597
8598Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8599say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 8600copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
8601C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8602and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8603fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8604you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8605any conclusion from our observations.
8606
8607@item
ff5dcc92 8608If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
8609diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8610@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 8611If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
8612context, not by line number.
8613
8614The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8615sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8616@end itemize
8617
8618Here are some things that are not necessary:
8619
8620@itemize @bullet
8621@item
8622A description of the envelope of the bug.
8623
8624Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8625which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8626changes will not affect it.
8627
8628This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8629will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8630with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8631We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8632
8633Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8634of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8635output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8636less time, and so on.
8637
8638However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8639report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8640
8641@item
8642A patch for the bug.
8643
8644A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8645the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8646a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8647to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8648
ff5dcc92 8649Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
8650construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8651through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8652able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8653fixed.
8654
8655And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8656patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8657help us to understand.
8658
8659@item
8660A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8661
8662Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8663things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8664@end itemize
8665
8666@node MRI
8667@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8668@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8669To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8670linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8671alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8672described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8673simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8674@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8675linker commands; these commands are described here.
8676
8677In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8678file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8679features to make use of them.
8680
8681You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8682@samp{-c} command-line option.
8683
8684Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8685command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8686blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8687MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8688issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8689
8690Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8691
8692You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8693lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8694The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8695
8696@table @code
8697@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8698@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8699@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8700Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8701the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8702@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8703your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8704script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8705commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8706input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8707@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8708
8709@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8710@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8711Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8712in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8713
8714@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8715
8716@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8717@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8718Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8719@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8720
8721@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8722@item BASE @var{expression}
8723Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8724absolute addresses) in the output file.
8725
8726@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8727@item CHIP @var{expression}
8728@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8729This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8730
8731@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8732@item END
8733This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8734
8735@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8736@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8737Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
dc12032b 8738language, but restricted to S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
252b5132
RH
8739
8740@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8741@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8742Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8743@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8744
8745The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8746same line, with no change in its effect.
8747
8748@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8749@item LOAD @var{filename}
8750@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8751Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8752same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8753command line.
8754
8755@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8756@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8757@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8758MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8759option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8760
8761@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8762@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8763@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8764Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8765order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8766script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8767sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8768file, in the order specified.
8769
8770@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8771@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8772@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8773@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8774Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8775@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8776
8777@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8778@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8779@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8780@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8781You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8782specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8783If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8784@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8785@end table
8786
793c5807
NC
8787@node GNU Free Documentation License
8788@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8789@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8790
370b66a1
CD
8791@node LD Index
8792@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8793
8794@printindex cp
8795
8796@tex
7ca01ed9 8797% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8798% meantime:
8799\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8800\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8801\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8802\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8803\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8804\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8805\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8806\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8807\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8808% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8809@end tex
8810
252b5132 8811@bye
This page took 1.87378 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.